Lipids and lipid compositions for the delivery of active agents

ABSTRACT

This invention provides for a compound of formula (I): 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R 1 -R 4 , L and X are defined herein. The compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are cationic lipids useful in the delivery of biologically active agents to cells and tissues.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.14/200,359, filed Mar. 7, 2014, which claims priority to and the benefitof U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/774,759, filed Mar. 8, 2013.The entire contents of these patent applications are hereby incorporatedherein by reference.

SEQUENCE LISTING

The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has beensubmitted electronically in ASCII format and is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on Sep. 23, 2015, isnamed PAT055439-US-NP-SEQ ID 1-4.txt and is 2,725 bytes in size.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

This invention relates to cationic lipid compounds and to compositionscomprising such compounds. This invention also relates to processes formaking such compounds and compositions, and to methods and uses of suchcompounds and compositions, e.g., to deliver biologically active agents,such as RNAi agents, to cells and tissues.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The delivery of biologically active agents (including therapeuticallyrelevant compounds) to subjects is often hindered by difficulties in thecompounds reaching the target cell or tissue. In particular, thetrafficking of many biologically active agents into living cells ishighly restricted by the complex membrane systems of the cells. Theserestrictions can result in the need to use much higher concentrations ofbiologically active agents than is desirable to achieve a result, whichincreases the risk of toxic effects and side effects. One solution tothis problem is to utilize specific carrier molecules which are allowedselective entry into the cell. Lipid carriers, biodegradable polymersand various conjugate systems can be used to improve delivery ofbiologically active agents to cells.

One class of biologically active agents that is particularly difficultto deliver to cells is a biotherapeutic (including nucleosides,nucleotides, polynucleotides, nucleic acids and derivatives, such asRNAi agents). In general, nucleic acids are stable for only a limitedduration in cells or plasma. The development of RNA interference, RNAitherapy, RNA drugs, antisense therapy and gene therapy, among others,has increased the need for an effective means of introducing activenucleic acid agents into cells. For these reasons, compositions that canstabilize and deliver nucleic acid-based agents into cells are ofparticular interest.

The most well-studied approaches for improving the transport of foreignnucleic acids into cells involve the use of viral vectors or cationiclipids. Viral vectors can be used to transfer genes efficiently intosome cell types, but they generally cannot be used to introducechemically synthesized molecules into cells.

An alternative approach is to use delivery compositions incorporatingcationic lipids which interact with a biologically active agent at onepart and interact with a membrane system at another part (for a review,see Felgner, 1990, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 5, 162-187 andFelgner, 1993, J. Liposome Res., 3, 3-16). Such compositions arereported to contain liposomes.

Since the first description of liposomes in 1965 by Bangham (J. Mol.Biol. 13, 238-252), there has been a sustained interest and effort indeveloping lipid-based carrier systems for the delivery of biologicallyactive agents. The process of introducing functional nucleic acids intocultured cells by using positively charged liposomes was first describedby Philip Feigner et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 84, 7413-7417(1987). The process was later demonstrated in vivo by K. L. Brigham etal., Am. J. Med. Sci., 298, 278-281 (1989).

Liposomes are attractive carriers since they protect biologicalmolecules from degradation while improving their cellular uptake. Out ofthe various classes of liposome, liposomes which contain cationic lipidsare commonly used for delivering polyanions (e.g. nucleic acids). Suchliposomes can be formed using cationic lipids alone and optionallyincluding other lipids and amphiphiles such as phosphatidylethanolamine.It is well known in the art that both the composition of the lipidformulation as well as its method of preparation affect the structureand size of the resultant aggregate.

The use of cationic lipids for cellular delivery of biologically activeagents has several advantages. The encapsulation of anionic compoundsusing cationic lipids is essentially quantitative due to electrostaticinteraction. In addition, it is believed that the cationic lipidsinteract with the negatively charged cell membranes initiating cellularmembrane transport (Akhtar et al., 1992, Trends Cell Bio., 2, 139; Xu etal., 1996, Biochemistry 35, 5616).

There is a need for further cationic lipids which facilitate thesystemic and local delivery of biologically active agents such as RNAiagents to cells. There is also a need for cationic lipids which,relative to those cationic lipids that are known in the art, improve thesystemic and local delivery of biologically active agents to cells.There is a further need for lipid formulations that have optimizedphysical characteristics for improved systemic and local delivery ofbiologically active agents to specific organs and to tumors, especiallytumors outside the liver.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In one aspect, this invention provides for a compound of formula (I):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R¹-R⁴, L and Xare defined herein. The compounds of formula (I) and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts thereof are cationic lipids useful in the delivery ofbiologically active agents to cells and tissues.

In a second aspect, this invention provides for a lipid compositioncomprising a compound according to formula (I) (i.e. a lipid compositionof the invention), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Inanother embodiment, at least one other lipid component is present. Inanother embodiment the lipid composition also comprises a biologicallyactive agent, optionally in combination with on one more other lipidcomponents. In another embodiment the lipid composition is in the formof a liposome. In another embodiment the lipid composition is in theform of a lipid nanoparticle (LNP). In another embodiment the lipidcomposition is suitable for delivery to the liver. In another embodimentthe lipid composition is suitable for delivery to a tumor. In anotherembodiment the lipid composition is suitable for immunization purposes.

In a third aspect, this invention provides for a pharmaceuticalcomposition (i.e. formulation) comprising a lipid composition of theinvention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Inanother embodiment at least one other lipid component is present in thelipid composition. In another embodiment the lipid composition is in theform of a liposome. In another embodiment the lipid composition is inthe form of a lipid nanoparticle. In another embodiment the lipidcomposition is suitable for delivery to the liver. In another embodimentthe lipid composition is suitable for delivery to a tumor. In anotherembodiment the biologically active agent is a siRNA. In anotherembodiment the lipid composition is suitable for immunization purposes,and the biologically active agent is a RNA which encodes an immunogen.

In a fourth aspect, this invention provides a method for the treatmentof a disease or condition comprising the step of administering atherapeutically effective amount of a lipid composition of the inventionto a patient in need of treatment thereof. In one embodiment, thedisease or condition is treatable by administering a siRNA agent.

In a fifth aspect, this invention provides for the use of a lipidcomposition of the invention in treating a disease or condition in apatient. In one embodiment, the disease or condition is treatable byadministering an RNAi agent.

In a sixth aspect, this invention provides a method for immunizing asubject against an immunogen of interest comprising the step ofadministering an immunologically effective amount of a lipid compositionof the invention to the subject, in combination with a RNA which encodesan immunogen.

In a seventh aspect, this invention provides for the use of a lipidcomposition of the invention in immunizing a subject against animmunogen of interest. The lipid is used in combination with a RNA whichencodes an immunogen.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides for a compound of formula (I):

wherein:L is C₁₋₆ alkylene, C₂₋₆ alkenylene, C₂₋₆ alkynylene, —(CH₂)_(r)—C₃₋₇cycloalkylene-(CH₂)_(s)—, —(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇ cycloalkenylene-(CH₂)_(s)—,—(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇ cycloalkynylene-(CH₂)_(s)—, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄alkylene-L2-C₁₋₄ alkylene-,

wherein in the * denotes attachment of the moiety to the NR¹R² group;

-   -   L2, attached in either direction, is —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—,        —OC(O)O—, —CONH—, S(O)₂NH—, NHCONH— or —NHCSNH—;    -   each s is independently 0, 1 or 2;    -   each t is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;    -   u is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;        R¹ and R² are each independently optionally substituted C₁₋₆        alkyl, optionally substituted C₂₋₆ alkenyl, optionally        substituted C₂₋₆ alkynyl, optionally substituted C₃₋₇        cycloalkyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, optionally substituted C₃₋₇        cycloalkenyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, optionally substituted C₃₋₇        cycloalkynyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, or optionally substituted        phenyl-(CH₂)_(s)—; wherein said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆        alkynyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkenyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkynyl,        and phenyl are optionally substituted with one or two        substituents each independently selected from the group        consisting of: OH, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, COOH, and COO—C₁₋₄ alkyl,    -   or        R¹ and R² are joined together forming an optionally substituted        4-12 membered heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring being        optionally substituted with one to three substituents each        independently selected from the group consisting of: OH, halo,        C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, dimethylamino, —COO—C₁₋₄ alkyl, phenyl,        piperidinyl, and morpholinyl; R³ and R⁴ are each independently:    -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (d) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(b)—Z⁴—R^(a),    -   (e) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a),    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (g) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (h) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(b)—Z⁴—R^(a),    -   (i) —R^(c),    -   (j) —Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c), or    -   (k) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c);    -   wherein Z¹, Z², Z³, and Z⁴, attached in either direction, are        each independently —O—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)O—, or —CONH—;    -   R^(a) is C₂₋₂₂ alkyl, C₂₋₂₂ alkenyl, or C₂₋₂₂ alkynyl;    -   each R^(b) is independently C₁₋₂₀ alkylene, C₂₋₂₀ alkenylene, or        C₂₋₂₀ alkynylene;    -   R^(c) is

-   -   -   R is C₅₋₂₂ alkyl, C₅₋₂₂ alkenyl, or C₅₋₂₂ alkynyl;        -   n is 0-12;        -   m, p, and q are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;

    -   provided that chains (a)-(h) have 12-30 carbon atoms and chains        (i)-(k) have 12-70 carbon atoms;

X is CR⁶ or N; and

R⁶ is H, halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl, or R⁴.

EMBODIMENTS

In one embodiment R¹ and R² are each independently optionallysubstituted C₁₋₆ alkyl. In another embodiment R¹ and R² are eachindependently optionally substituted methyl or optionally substitutedethyl. In another embodiment R¹ is methyl and R² is optionallysubstituted ethyl. In another embodiment R¹ and R² are both methyl.

In another embodiment R¹ and R² are joined together forming anoptionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring. In anotherembodiment the 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring is optionally substitutedazetidinyl, optionally substituted pyrrolyl, or optionally substitutedpiperidinyl. In another embodiment the 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring isazetidinyl, pyrrolyl, or piperidinyl each of which is optionallysubstituted with one OH group. In another embodiment the 4-7 memberedheterocyclic ring is azetidinyl, pyrrolyl, or piperidinyl.

In another embodiment L is C₁₋₆ alkylene, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄alkylene-L2-C₁₋₄ alkylene-,

In another embodiment L is *—C₁₋₃ alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₂alkylene-,

-   -   wherein s is 0 and u is 1, or

wherein s is 0, t is 1 and u is 1.

In another embodiment L is methylene, ethylene, or propylene. In anotherembodiment L is methylene.

In another embodiment L2, attached in either direction, is —C(O)O—,—OCOO—, or —CONH—.

In another embodiment L is *—C₁₋₃ alkylene-O—C(O)—.

In another embodiment L is *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₂ alkylene-, whereinL2, attached in either direction, is —C(O)O—, or —OC(O)O—.

In another embodiment L is:

In one embodiment the L-NR¹R² group formula (I) is selected from thelist in Table 1.

TABLE 1 L—NR¹R² groups of formula (I), wherein the dashed line indicatesthe point of attachment to formula (I). Structure

In another embodiment the L-NR¹R² group of formula (I) is selected fromthe list in Table 2.

TABLE 2 L—NR¹R² groups of formula (I), wherein the dashed line indicatesthe point of attachment to formula (I). Structure

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently:

-   -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (e) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a),    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (g) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (i) —R^(c), or    -   (j) —Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c).

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently:

-   -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (e) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a),    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), or    -   (g) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a).

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently:

-   -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), or    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a).

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a).

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (i) —R^(c) or (j)—Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c).

In another embodiment R⁴═R³.

In another embodiment R^(a) is C₂₋₂₂ alkyl or C₂₋₂₂ alkenyl. In anotherembodiment R^(a) is C₄₋₂₀ alkyl. In another embodiment R^(a) is C₅₋₁₈alkyl. In another embodiment R^(a) is C₂₋₂₂ alkenyl having one to threedouble bonds. In another embodiment R^(a) is C₁₀₋₂₀ alkenyl having oneto three double bonds, suitably having one or two double bonds. Inanother embodiment R^(a) is C₁₁₋₁₈ alkenyl having one to three doublebonds, suitably one or two double bonds, suitably two double bonds.

In another embodiment each R^(b) is independently C₁₋₂₀ alkylene. Inanother embodiment each R^(b) is independently C₁₋₁₅ alkylene, suitablyC₁₋₁₀ alkylene.

In another embodiment R^(c) is (c1) or (c3). In another embodiment R^(c)is (c1) or (c3) wherein n is 1 or 2; m is 0 or 1; and p is 1.

In another embodiment Z¹ is —O—, —OCO—, or —CONH—. Suitably Z¹ is —O—.Suitably Z¹ is —OCO—.

In another embodiment Z² is —OCO—, —COO—, —NHCO—, or —OCOO—. Suitably Z²is —OCO— or —COO—. Suitably Z² is —OCO—.

In another embodiment Z³ is —OCO— or —COO—.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (a) —Z¹—R^(a),(b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a) or (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a), wherein Z¹ is—O—.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (e)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a), (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a) or (g)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a), wherein Z¹ is —OCO—.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (a) —Z¹—R^(a)wherein Z¹ is —O—, —OCO—, or —CONH— and R^(a) is C₁₂₋₁₈ alkenyl havingone to three double bonds, suitably one or two double bonds, suitablytwo double bonds. Suitably R⁴═R³.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a) wherein Z¹ is —O—, Z² is —OCO—, R^(b) is C₁₋₁₅alkylene, suitably C₂₋₁₀ alkylene and R^(a) is C₅₋₁₈ alkyl or C₁₁₋₁₈alkenyl having one to three double bonds. Suitably R⁴═R³.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (c)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a) wherein Z¹ is —O—, Z² is —O— or —OCO—, Z³ is—O—, each R^(b) is independently C₂₋₇ alkylene and R^(a) is C₈₋₉ alkylor C17 alkenyl having two double bonds. Suitably R⁴═R³.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (e)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a) wherein Z¹ is —OCO—, R^(b) is methylene and R^(a) isC₁₂₋₁₈ alkyl or C₁₇ alkenyl having two double bonds.

Suitably R⁴═R³.

In another embodiment R³ and R⁴ are each independently (f)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a) wherein Z¹ is —OCO—, Z² is —COO—, —NHCO—,—OCO—, —OCOO—, each R^(b) is independently C₂₋₉ alkylene and R^(a) isC₇₋₉ alkyl or C₁₇₋₁₈ alkenyl having two double bonds. Suitably R⁴═R³.

In another embodiment X is CR⁶, wherein R⁶ is H, chloro, bromo, or C₁₋₃alkyl. Suitably X is CH.

In another embodiment X is N.

As used herein, the term “alkyl” refers to a fully saturated branched orunbranched hydrocarbon chain having the specified number of carbonatoms. For example, C₁₋₆ alkyl refers to an alkyl group having from 1 to6 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups may be optionally substituted with one ormore substituents as defined in formula (I). Representative examples ofalkyl include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl,iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl,isopentyl, neopentyl, n-hexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 2,2-dimethylpentyl,2,3-dimethylpentyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-nonyl, n-decyl, n-undecanyl,n-dodecanyl, n-tridecanyl, 9-methylheptadecanyl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkylene” refers to divalent alkyl group asdefined herein above. Representative examples of alkylene include, butare not limited to, methylene, ethylene, n-propylene, iso-propylene,n-butylene, sec-butylene, iso-butylene, tert-butylene, n-pentylene,isopentylene, neopentylene, n-hexylene, 3-methylhexylene,2,2-dimethylpentylene, 2,3-dimethylpentylene, n-heptylene, n-octylene,n-nonylene, n-decylene, and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkenyl” refers to an unsaturated branched orunbranched hydrocarbon chain having the specified number of carbon atomsand one or more carbon-carbon double bonds within the chain. Forexample, C₂₋₆ alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbonatoms with one or more carbon-carbon double bonds within the chain. Incertain embodiments alkenyl groups have one carbon-carbon double bondwithin the chain. In other embodiments, alkenyl groups have more thanone carbon-carbon double bond within the chain. Alkyenyl groups may beoptionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined informula (I). Representative examples of alkenyl include, but are notlimited to, ethylenyl, propenyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl and thelike. Other examples of alkenyl include, but are not limited to:Z-octadec-9-enyl, Z-undec-7-enyl, Z-heptadeca-8-enyl,(9Z,12Z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl, (8Z,11 Z)-heptadeca-8,11-dienyl, and (8Z,11Z, 14Z)-heptadeca-8,11,14-trienyl.

As used herein, the term “alkenylene” refers a divalent alkenyl group asdefined herein above. Representative examples of alkenylene include, butare not limited to, ethenylene, propenylene, butenylene, pentenylene,hexenylene and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkynyl” refers to an unsaturated branched orunbranched hydrocarbon chain having the specified number of carbon atomsand one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds. For example C₂₋₆ alkynylrefers to an alkynyl group having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms with one ormore carbon-carbon triple bonds within the chain. In certain embodimentsalkynyl groups have one carbon-carbon triple bond within the chain. Inother embodiments alkynyl groups have more than one carbon-carbon triplebond within the chain. Alkynyl groups may be optionally substituted withone or more substituents as defined in formula (I). Representativeexamples of alkynyl include, but are not limited to ethynyl, 1-propynyl,propargyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkynylene” refers to a divalent alkynyl groupas herein defined above. Representative examples of alkynylene include,but are not limited to ethynylene, propynylene, propargylene,butynylene, pentynlene, hexynylene and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkoxy” refers to refers to any alkyl moietyattached through an oxygen bridge (i.e. a —O—C₁₋₃ alkyl group whereinC₁₋₃ alkyl is as defined herein). Examples of such groups include, butare not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, and propoxy.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkyl” refers to a saturated monocyclic,bicyclic or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring having the specified number ofcarbon atoms. For example, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl refers to a cycloalkyl ringhaving from 3 to 7 carbon atoms. Cycloalkyl groups may be optionallysubstituted with one or more substituents as defined in formula (I).Representative examples of cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to,cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, bicyclo[2.1.1]hexyl,bicyclo[2.2.1]heptyl, adamantyl and the like.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkylene” refers to a divalent cycloalkylgroup as defined above.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkenyl” refers to a non-aromatic,unsaturated monocylic, bicyclic or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring having thespecified number of carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon doublebonds. For example, C₃₋₇ cycloalkeneyl refers to a cycloalkenyl grouphaving from 3 to 7 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon doublebonds. In certain embodiments cycloalkenyl groups have one carbon-carbondouble bond within the ring. In other embodiments, cycloalkenyl groupshave more than one carbon-carbon double bond within the ring.Representative examples of cycloalkenyl include, but are not limited to,cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyland the like.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkenylene” refers to a divalentcycloalkenyl group as defined herein above.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkynyl” refers to an unsaturatedmonocylic, bicyclic or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring having the specifiednumber of carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds. Forexample, C₃₋₇ cycloalkynyl refers to a cycloalkynyl group having from 3to 7 carbon atoms. In certain embodiments cycloalkynyl groups have onecarbon-carbon triple bond within the ring. In other embodiments,cycloalkynyl groups have more than one carbon-carbon triple bond withinthe ring. Representative examples of cycloalkynyl include, but are notlimited to, cyclopropynyl, cyclobutynyl, cyclopentynyl, cyclohexynyl,cycloheptynyl and the like.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkynylene” refers to a divalentcycloalkynyl group as defined herein above.

As used herein, the term “halo” refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo, andiodo.

As used herein, the term “heterocyclic” refers to a 4 to 12 memberedsaturated or unsaturated monocyclic or bicyclic ring containing from 1to 4 heteroatoms. Heterocyclic ring systems are not aromatic.Heterocyclic groups containing more than one heteroatom may containdifferent heteroatoms. Heterocyclic groups may be optionally substitutedwith one or more substituents as defined in formula (I). Heterocyclicgroups are monocyclic, spiro, or fused or bridged bicyclic ring systems.Examples of monocyclic heterocyclic groups include tetrahydrofuranyl,dihydrofuranyl, 1,4-dioxanyl, morpholinyl, 1,4-dithianyl, azetidinyl,piperazinyl, piperidinyl, 1,3-dioxolanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl,pyrrolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl,1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, oxathiolanyl, dithiolanyl, 1,3-dioxanyl,1,3-dithianyl, oxathianyl, thiomorpholinyl,1,4,7-trioxa-10-azacyclododecanyl, azapanyl and the like. Examples ofspiro heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to,1,5-dioxa-9-azaspiro[5.5]undecanyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-azaspiro[4.5]decanyl,2-oxa-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonanyl, and the like. Fused heterocyclic ringsystems have from 8 to 11 ring atoms and include groups wherein aheterocyclic ring is fused to a phenyl ring. Examples of fusedheterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to decahydroqunilinyl,(4aS, 8aR)-decahydroisoquinolinyl(4aS,8aS)-decahydroisoquinolinyl,octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrolyl, isoinolinyl,(3aR,7aS)-hexahydro-[1,3]dioxolo[4.5-c]pyridinyl,octahydro-1H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl and thelike.

As used herein, the term “an optical isomer” or “a stereoisomer” refersto any of the various stereoisomeric configurations which may exist fora given compound of the present invention and includes geometricisomers. It is understood that a substituent may be attached at a chiralcenter of a carbon atom. The term “chiral” refers to molecules whichhave the property of non-superimposability on their mirror imagepartner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which aresuperimposable on their mirror image partner. Therefore, the inventionincludes enantiomers, diastereomers or racemates of the compound.“Enantiomers” are a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposablemirror images of each other. A 1:1 mixture of a pair of enantiomers is a“racemic” mixture. The term is used to designate a racemic mixture whereappropriate. “Diastereoisomers” are stereoisomers that have at least twoasymmetric atoms, but which are not mirror-images of each other. Theabsolute stereochemistry is specified according to theCahn-Ingold-Prelog R-S system. When a compound is a pure enantiomer thestereochemistry at each chiral carbon may be specified by either R or S.Resolved compounds whose absolute configuration is unknown can bedesignated (+) or (−) depending on the direction (dextro- orlevorotatory) which they rotate plane polarized light at the wavelengthof the sodium D line. Certain compounds described herein contain one ormore asymmetric centers or axes and may thus give rise to enantiomers,diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, interms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-.

Depending on the choice of the starting materials and procedures, thecompounds can be present in the form of one of the possible isomers oras mixtures thereof, for example as pure optical isomers, or as isomermixtures, such as racemates and diastereoisomer mixtures, depending onthe number of asymmetric carbon atoms. The present invention is meant toinclude all such possible isomers, including racemic mixtures,diasteriomeric mixtures and optically pure forms. Optically active (R)-and (S)-isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiralreagents, or resolved using conventional techniques. If the compoundcontains a double bond, the substituent may be E or Z configuration. Ifthe compound contains a disubstituted cycloalkyl, the cycloalkylsubstituent may have a cis- or trans-configuration. All tautomeric formsare also intended to be included.

Any asymmetric atom (e.g., carbon or the like) of the compound(s) of thepresent invention can be present in racemic or enantiomericallyenriched, for example the (R)-, (S)- or (R,S)-configuration. In certainembodiments, each asymmetric atom has at least 50% enantiomeric excess,at least 60% enantiomeric excess, at least 70% enantiomeric excess, atleast 80% enantiomeric excess, at least 90% enantiomeric excess, atleast 95% enantiomeric excess, or at least 99% enantiomeric excess inthe (R)- or (S)-configuration. Substituents at atoms with unsaturateddouble bonds may, if possible, be present in cis-(Z)- or trans-(E)-form.

Accordingly, as used herein a compound of the present invention can bein the form of one of the possible isomers, rotamers, atropisomers,tautomers or mixtures thereof, for example, as substantially puregeometric (cis or trans) isomers, diastereomers, optical isomers(antipodes), racemates or mixtures thereof.

Any resulting mixtures of isomers can be separated on the basis of thephysicochemical differences of the constituents, into the pure orsubstantially pure geometric or optical isomers, diastereomers,racemates, for example, by chromatography and/or fractionalcrystallization.

Any resulting racemates of final products or intermediates can beresolved into the optical antipodes by known methods, e.g., byseparation of the diastereomeric salts thereof, obtained with anoptically active acid or base, and liberating the optically activeacidic or basic compound. In particular, a basic moiety may thus beemployed to resolve the compounds of the present invention into theiroptical antipodes, e.g., by fractional crystallization of a salt formedwith an optically active acid, e.g., tartaric acid, dibenzoyl tartaricacid, diacetyl tartaric acid, di-O,O′-p-toluoyl tartaric acid, mandelicacid, malic acid or camphor-10-sulfonic acid. Racemic products can alsobe resolved by chiral chromatography, e.g., high pressure liquidchromatography (HPLC) using a chiral adsorbent.

As used herein, the terms “salt” or “salts” refers to an acid additionor base addition salt of a compound of the invention. “Salts” include inparticular “pharmaceutically acceptable salts”. The term“pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to salts that retain thebiological effectiveness and properties of the compounds of thisinvention and, which typically are not biologically or otherwiseundesirable. In many cases, the compounds of the present invention arecapable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence ofamino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.

Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts can be formed withinorganic acids and organic acids, e.g., acetate, aspartate, benzoate,besylate, bromide/hydrobromide, bicarbonate/carbonate,bisulfate/sulfate, camphorsulfonate, chloride/hydrochloride,chlortheophyllonate, citrate, ethandisulfonate, fumarate, gluceptate,gluconate, glucuronate, hippurate, hydroiodide/iodide, isethionate,lactate, lactobionate, laurylsulfate, malate, maleate, malonate,mandelate, mesylate, methylsulphate, naphthoate, napsylate, nicotinate,nitrate, octadecanoate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate,phosphate/hydrogen phosphate/dihydrogen phosphate, polygalacturonate,propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfosalicylate, tartrate, tosylate andtrifluoroacetate salts.

Inorganic acids from which salts can be derived include, for example,hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid,phosphoric acid, and the like.

Organic acids from which salts can be derived include, for example,acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid,malonic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid,benzoic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid,toluenesulfonic acid, sulfosalicylic acid, and the like.Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts can be formed withinorganic and organic bases.

Inorganic bases from which salts can be derived include, for example,ammonium salts and metals from columns I to XII of the periodic table.In certain embodiments, the salts are derived from sodium, potassium,ammonium, calcium, magnesium, iron, silver, zinc, and copper;particularly suitable salts include ammonium, potassium, sodium, calciumand magnesium salts.

Organic bases from which salts can be derived include, for example,primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, substituted amines includingnaturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines, basic ionexchange resins, and the like. Certain organic amines includeisopropylamine, benzathine, cholinate, diethanolamine, diethylamine,lysine, meglumine, piperazine and tromethamine.

The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can besynthesized from a basic or acidic moiety, by conventional chemicalmethods. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting free acidforms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriatebase (such as Na, Ca, Mg, or K hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate or thelike), or by reacting free base forms of these compounds with astoichiometric amount of the appropriate acid. Such reactions aretypically carried out in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixtureof the two. Generally, use of non-aqueous media like ether, ethylacetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile is desirable, wherepracticable. Lists of additional suitable salts can be found, e.g., in“Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences”, 20th ed., Mack PublishingCompany, Easton, Pa., (1985); and in “Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts:Properties, Selection, and Use” by Stahl and Wermuth (Wiley-VCH,Weinheim, Germany, 2002).

General Methods for Synthesizing Cationic Lipids

The present invention also includes processes for the preparation ofcompounds of formula (I). In the reactions described, it could benecessary to protect reactive functional groups, for example hydroxyl,amino, iminio, thio or carboxy groups, where these are desired in thefinal product, to avoid their unwanted participation in the reactions.

The compounds and processes of the present invention will be betterunderstood in connection with the following synthetic schemes, which aremerely intended to illustrate methods by which the compounds may begenerally prepared and are not intended to limit the scope of theinvention as defined in the claims.

Final compounds of formula (I) can be prepared as described in Scheme I.

A compound of formula (I) can be prepared by reacting a compound offormula 2 with a compound of formula 3 using a suitable reducing agent(e.g. sodium acetoxyborohydride and the like) and optionally a Lewisacid (e.g. titanium tetraisopropoxide and the like) in a suitablesolvent such as ethanol. The reaction can be carried out between roomtemperature and 80° C. and can take up to 24 hours to complete.

Compounds of formula (I) can also be prepared by proceeding as describedin Scheme

A compound of formula I can be prepared by reacting a compound offormula 4 where Y is a chloro, bromo, iodo, mesyl, tosyl, or otherleaving group with a compound of formula 5 in DMF or another suitablesolvent at a temperature from 20 to 180° C.

Final compounds of formula (Ia) can be prepared as described in SchemeIII.

A compound of formula (Ia) can be prepared by reacting an alcohol offormula 6 with an acid of formula 7 in dichloromethane or anothersuitable solvent using EDC or another suitable coupling agent withoptional based or catalyst, such as DMAP at a temperature from 20° C. to150° C.

Compounds of formula 4 and 6 can be prepared from the appropriateprecursor of formula 7 by methods known to those skilled in the art, forexample, as described in Scheme IV.

A compound of formula 6 can be prepared by reacting a compound offormula 2 with sodium borohydride or other appropriate reducing agent(e.g. diisobutylaluminum hydride, lithium borohydride, etc) in ethanolor other appropriate solvent at a temperature between −20° C. and 150°C. A compound of formula 4 can be prepared from a compound of formula 6by reaction with mesyl anhydride or other appropriate activating agent(e.g. tosyl chloride, phosphorousoxychloride, etc) in dichloromethane orother appropriate solvent at a temperature between −20° C. and 80° C.

Compounds of formula 2 can be prepared as described in Scheme V.

A compound of formula 2 can be prepared from a compound of formula 8 byreacting with a compound of formula 9 in the presence of DIAD or otherappropriate diazo compound (e.g. DEAD, etc) with triphenylphosphine orother appropriate phosphine (e.g.trimethylphosphine) in dichloromethaneor other suitable solvent at a temperature between −20° C. and 50° C.

Alternatively, compounds of formula 2 can be prepared according toScheme VI.

A compound of formula 2 can be prepared from a compound of formula 8 byreacting with a compound of formula 10, where Y is a halogen, mesylate,or other appropriate leaving group, in the presence of potassiumcarbonate or other suitable base (e.g. cesium carbonate, tribasicpotassium phosphate, etc) in DMF or other suitable solvent at atemperature between 20 and 180° C. A compound of formula 10 can beprepared from a compound of formula 9 by reacting with mesyl chloride orother suitable activating agent (e.g. tosyl chloride,phosphorousoxychloride, etc) in the presence of pyridine or othersuitable base in dichloromethane or other suitable solvent at atemperature between −20° C. and 180° C.

Alternatively, compounds of formula 2 can be made according to SchemeVII.

A compound of formula 2 can be prepared from a compound of formula 11 byreacting with a compound of formula 12 and EDC or other suitablecoupling agent (e.g. DIC, HATU, etc) in the presence of DMAP or otherappropriate catalyst and DIEA or other appropriate base indichloromethane or other appropriate solvent (e.g. DMF, DCE, etc) at atemperature between 0° C. and 180° C.

Alternatively, compounds of formula 2 can be made according to SchemeVIII.

A compound of formula 2 can be prepared from a compound of formula 13 byreacting with a compound of formula 14 and EDC or other suitablecoupling agent (e.g. DIC, HATU, etc) in the presence of DMAP or otherappropriate catalyst and DIEA or other appropriate base indichloromethane or other appropriate solvent (e.g. DMF, DCE, etc) at atemperature between 0° C. and 180° C.

pKa for Cationic Lipids

The compounds of formula (I) are cationic lipids useful in the deliveryof biologically active agents to cells and tissues. It has been foundthat lipid compositions for the delivery of biologically active agentscan be adjusted to preferentially target one cell type or organ overanother by altering only the cationic lipid in the formulation. Forexample, a cationic lipid with a pKa of from about 5.1 to about 7.4 isgenerally effective when used in a formulation for delivery to theliver. In one embodiment, the pKa of a cationic lipid is from about 5.1to about 7.4 for delivery to liver. In another embodiment, the pKa of acationic lipid is from about 5.3 to about 7.0 for delivery to liver. Inanother embodiment, the pKa of a cationic lipid is from about 5.3 toabout 6.6 for delivery to liver. For tumor delivery, a cationic lipidwith a pKa of from about 5.3 to about 6.4 is particularly effective whenused in a formulation for delivery of a biologically active agent to atumor. Thus, in one embodiment, the pKa of a cationic lipid is fromabout 5.3 to about 6.4 for delivery to tumors. In another embodiment,the pKa of a cationic lipid is from about 5.4 to about 6.2 for deliveryto tumors. In another embodiment, the pKa of the cationic lipid is fromabout 5.8 to about 6.1 for delivery to tumors. For immunizationpurposes, the pKa of a cationic lipid is usefully from 5.0 to 7.6, suchas from 5.7 to 5.9 (see WO2012/006378).

Lipid Compositions

The present invention provides for a lipid composition comprising atleast one compound of formula (I), i.e. a lipid composition of theinvention. In one embodiment, at least one other lipid component ispresent. Such compositions can also contain a biologically active agent,optionally in combination with one or more other lipid components.

One embodiment of the present invention provides for a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I) and another lipid component. Suchother lipid components include, but are not limited to, cationic lipids,neutral lipids, anionic lipids, helper lipids, and stealth lipids.

Cationic lipids suitable for use in a lipid composition of the inventioninclude, but are not limited to, N,N-dioleyl-N,N-dimethylammoniumchloride (DODAC), N,N-distearyl-N,N-dimethylammonium bromide (DDAB),N-(1-(2,3-dioleoyloxy) propyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride (DOTAP),1,2-Dioleoyl-3-Dimethylammonium-propane (DODAP),N-(1-(2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride (DOTMA),1,2-Dioleoylcarbamyl-3-Dimethylammonium-propane (DOCDAP),1,2-Dilineoyl-3-Dimethylammonium-propane (DLINDAP), dilauryl(C_(12:0))trimethyl ammonium propane (DLTAP), Dioctadecylamidoglycyl spermine(DOGS), DC-Chol,Dioleoyloxy-N-[2-sperminecarboxamido)ethyl}-N,N-dimethyl-1-propanaminiumtrifluoroacetate(DOSPA), 1,2-Dimyristyloxypropyl-3-dimethyl-hydroxyethyl ammoniumbromide (DMRIE), 3-Dimethylamino-2-(Cholest-5-en-3-beta-oxybutan-4-oxy)-1-(cis,cis-9,12-octadecadienoxy)propane(CLinDMA), N,N-dimethyl-2,3-dioleyloxy)propylamine (DODMA),2-[5′-(cholest-5-en-3[beta]-oxy)-3′-oxapentoxy)-3-dimethyl-1-(cis,cis-9′,12′-octadecadienoxy)propane (CpLinDMA) and N,N-Dimethyl-3,4-dioleyloxybenzylamine (DMOBA),and 1,2-N,N′-Dioleylcarbamyl-3-dimethylaminopropane (DOcarbDAP). In oneembodiment the cationic lipid is DOTAP or DLTAP.

Neutral lipids suitable for use in a lipid composition of the inventioninclude, for example, a variety of neutral, uncharged or zwitterioniclipids. Examples of neutral phospholipids suitable for use in thepresent invention include, but are not limited to:5-heptadecylbenzene-1,3-diol (resorcinol), cholesterol hemisuccinate(CHEMS), dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC),distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), phosphocholine (DOPC),dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine (DMPC), phosphatidylcholine (PLPC),1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DAPC),phosphatidylethanolamine (PE), egg phosphatidylcholine (EPC),dilauryloylphosphatidylcholine (DLPC), dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine(DMPC), 1-myristoyl-2-palmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (MPPC),1-palmitoyl-2-myristoyl phosphatidylcholine (PMPC),1-palmitoyl-2-stearoyl phosphatidylcholine (PSPC),1,2-diarachidoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DBPC),1-stearoyl-2-palmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (SPPC),1,2-dieicosenoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DEPC), palmitoyloleoylphosphatidylcholine (POPC), lysophosphatidyl choline, dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE), dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholinedistearoylphophatidylethanolamine (DSPE), dimyristoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DMPE), dipalmitoyl phosphatidylethanolamine(DPPE), palmitoyloleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine (POPE),lysophosphatidylethanolamine and combinations thereof. In oneembodiment, the neutral phospholipid is selected from the groupconsisting of distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC) and dimyristoylphosphatidyl ethanolamine (DMPE).

Anionic lipids suitable for use in the present invention include, butare not limited to, phosphatidylglycerol, cardiolipin,diacylphosphatidylserine, diacylphosphatidic acid, N-dodecanoylphosphatidyl ethanoloamine, N-succinyl phosphatidylethanolamine,N-glutaryl phosphatidylethanolamine and lysylphosphatidylglycerol.

Suitable neutral and anionic lipids also include those described in US2009/0048197.

Helper lipids are lipids that enhance transfection (e.g. transfection ofthe nanoparticle including the biologically active agent) to someextent. The mechanism by which the helper lipid enhances transfectionmay include, e.g., enhancing particle stability and/or enhancingmembrane fusogenicity. Helper lipids include steroids and alkylresorcinols. Helper lipids suitable for use in the present inventioninclude, but are not limited to, cholesterol, 5-heptadecylresorcinol,and cholesterol hemisuccinate.

Stealth lipids are lipids that increase the length of time for which thenanoparticles can exist in vivo (e.g. in the blood). Stealth lipidssuitable for use in a lipid composition of the invention include, butare not limited to, stealth lipids having a hydrophilic head grouplinked to a lipid moiety. Examples of such stealth lipids includecompounds of formula (XI), as described in WO2011/076807,

or a salt or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof,wherein:

Z is a hydrophilic head group component selected from PEG and polymersbased on poly(oxazoline), poly(ethyleneoxide), poly(vinyl alcohol),poly(glycerol), poly(N-vinylpyrrolidone),poly[N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide], polysaccharides and poly(aminoacid)s, wherein the polymer may be linear or branched, and wherein thepolymer may be optionally substituted;

wherein Z is polymerized by n subunits;

n is a number-averaged degree of polymerization between 10 and 200 unitsof Z, wherein n is optimized for different polymer types;

L₁ is an optionally substituted C₁₋₁₀ alkylene or C₁₋₁₀ heteroalkylenelinker including zero, one, two or more of an ether (e.g., —O—), ester(e.g., —C(O)O—), succinate (e.g., —O(O)C—CH₂—CH₂—C(O)O—)), carbamate(e.g., —OC(O)—NR′—), carbonate (e.g., —OC(O)O—), ketone (e.g.,—C—C(O)—C—), carbonyl (e.g., —C(O)—), urea (e.g., —NRC(O)NR′—), amine(e.g., —NR′—), amide (e.g., —C(O)NR′—), imine (e.g., —C(NR′)—),thioether (e.g., —S—), xanthate (e.g., —OC(S)S—), and phosphodiester(e.g., —OP(O)₂O—); any of which may be substituted by zero, one or moreZ groups;

wherein R′ is independently selected from —H, —NH—, —NH₂, —O—, —S—, aphosphate or an optionally substituted C₁₋₁₀ alkylene;

X₁ and X₂ are independently selected from a carbon or a heteroatomselected from —NH—, —O—, —S— or a phosphate;

A₁ and A₂ are independently selected from a C₆₋₃₀ alkyl, C₆₋₃₀ alkenyl,and C₆₋₃₀ alkynyl, wherein A¹ and A₂ may be the same or different,

or wherein A₁ and A₂ together with the carbon atom to which they areattached form an optionally substituted steroid.

Specific stealth lipids include, but are not limited to, those listed inTable 3.

TABLE 3 Stealth Lipids Stealth Lipid Lipid S001

S002

S003

S004

S005

S006

S007

S008

S009

S010

S011

S012

S013

S014

S015

S016

S017

S018

S019

S020

S021

S022

S023

S024

S025

S026

Other stealth lipids suitable for use in a lipid composition of thepresent invention and information about the biochemistry of such lipidscan be found in Romberg et al., Pharmaceutical Research, Vol. 25, No. 1,2008, p. 55-71 and Hoekstra et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1660(2004) 41-52.

In one embodiment, the suitable stealth lipid comprises a group selectedfrom PEG (sometimes referred to as poly(ethylene oxide) and polymersbased on poly(oxazoline), poly(vinyl alcohol), poly(glycerol),poly(N-vinylpyrrolidone), polyaminoacids and poly[N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide]. Additional suitable PEG lipids are disclosed, e.g., inWO 2006/007712.

Specific suitable stealth lipids includepolyethyleneglycol-diacylglycerol or polyethyleneglycol-diacylglycamide(PEG-DAG) conjugates including those comprising a dialkylglycerol ordialkylglycamide group having alkyl chain length independentlycomprising from about C₄ to about C₄₀ saturated or unsaturated carbonatoms. The dialkylglycerol or dialkylglycamide group can furthercomprise one or more substituted alkyl groups. In any of the embodimentsdescribed herein, the PEG conjugate can be selected fromPEG-dilaurylglycerol, PEG-dimyristylglycerol (PEG-DMG) (catalog # GM-020from NOF, Tokyo, Japan), PEG-dipalmitoylglycerol, PEG-disterylglycerol,PEG-dilaurylglycamide, PEG-dimyristylglycamide,PEG-dipalmitoylglycamide, and PEG-disterylglycamide, PEG-cholesterol(1-[8′-(Cholest-5-en-3[beta]-oxy)carboxamido-3′,6′-dioxaoctanyl]carbamoyl-[omega]-methyl-poly(ethyleneglycol), PEG-DMB (3,4-Ditetradecoxylbenzyl-[omega]-methyl-poly(ethyleneglycol) ether),1,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine-N-[methoxy(polyethyleneglycol)-2000] (catalog #880150P from Avanti Polar Lipids, Alabaster,Ala., USA).

In one embodiment the stealth lipid is S010 or S011.

In another embodiment the stealth lipid is PEG-dimyristylglycerol(PEG-DMG).

Unless otherwise indicated, the term “PEG” as used herein means anypolyethylene glycol or other polyalkylene ether polymer. In oneembodiment, PEG is an optionally substituted linear or branched polymerof ethylene glycol or ethylene oxide. In one embodiment PEG isunsubstituted. In one embodiment the PEG is substituted, e.g., by one ormore alkyl, alkoxy, acyl or aryl groups. In one embodiment, the termincludes PEG copolymers such as PEG-polyurethane or PEG-polypropylene(see, e.g., J. Milton Harris, Poly(ethylene glycol) chemistry:biotechnical and biomedical applications (1992)); in another embodiment,the term does not include PEG copolymers. In one embodiment, the PEG hasa molecular weight of from about 130 to about 50,000, in asub-embodiment about 150 to about 30,000, in a sub-embodiment about 150to about 20,000, in a sub-embodiment about 150 to about 15,000, in asub-embodiment about 150 to about 10,000, in a sub-embodiment about 150to about 6000, in a sub-embodiment about 150 to about 5000, in asub-embodiment about 150 to about 4000, in a sub-embodiment about 150 toabout 3000, in a sub-embodiment about 300 to about 3000, in asub-embodiment about 1000 to about 3000, and in a sub-embodiment about1500 to about 2500.

In certain embodiments the PEG is a “PEG-2K”, also termed “PEG 2000”,which has an average molecular weight of about 2000 daltons. PEG-2K isrepresented herein by the following formula (XIIa), wherein n is 45,meaning that the number-averaged degree of polymerization comprisesabout 45 subunits. However, other PEG embodiments known in the art maybe used, including, e.g., those where the number-averaged degree ofpolymerization comprises about 23 subunits (n=23) and/or 68 subunits(n=68).

The lipid compositions of the invention can also include one or morebiologically active agents including, but not limited to, antibodies(e.g., monoclonal, chimeric, humanized, nanobodies, and fragmentsthereof etc.), cholesterol, hormones, peptides, proteins,chemotherapeutics and other types of antineoplastic agents, lowmolecular weight drugs, vitamins, co-factors, nucleosides, nucleotides,oligonucleotides, enzymatic nucleic acids, antisense nucleic acids,triplex forming oligonucleotides, antisense DNA or RNA compositions,chimeric DNA:RNA compositions, allozymes, aptamers, ribozyme, decoys andanalogs thereof, plasmids and other types of expression vectors, andsmall nucleic acid molecules, RNAi agents, short interfering nucleicacid (siNA), short interfering RNA (siRNA), double-stranded RNA (dsRNA),micro-RNA (miRNA), and short hairpin RNA (shRNA) molecules, peptidenucleic acid (PNA), a locked nucleic acid ribonucleotide (LNA),morpholino nucleotide, threose nucleic acid (TNA), glycol nucleic acid(GNA), sisiRNA (small internally segmented interfering RNA), aiRNA(assymetrical interfering RNA), and siRNA with 1, 2 or more mismatchesbetween the sense and anti-sense strand to relevant cells and/ortissues, such as in a cell culture, subject or organism. Such compoundsmay be purified or partially purified, and may be naturally occuring orsynthetic, and may be chemically modified. In one embodiment thebiologically active agent is an RNAi agent, short interfering nucleicacid (siNA), short interfering RNA (siRNA), double-stranded RNA (dsRNA),micro-RNA (miRNA), or a short hairpin RNA (shRNA) molecule. In oneembodiment the biologically active agent is a RNAi agent useful formediating RNA interference (RNAi).

Various methods for loading biologically active agents into lipidcompositions, such as liposomes and lipid nanoparticles are available inthe art, including both passive and active loading methods. The exactmethod used may be chosen based on multiple factors that include, butare not limited to, e.g., the biologically active agent to be loaded,the storage method to be used once loaded, the size of the resultingparticle, and the dosage regimen contemplated. Methods include, e.g.,mechanical mixing of the drug and lipids at the time the liposomes areformed or reconstituted, dissolving all components in an organic solventand concentrating them into a dry film, forming a pH or ion gradient todraw the active agent into the interior of the liposome, creating atransmembrane potential, and ionophore mediated loading. See, e.g., PCTPublication No. WO 95/08986, U.S. Pat. No. 5,837,282, U.S. Pat. No.5,837,282, and U.S. Pat. No. 7,811,602.

By “lipid nanoparticle” is meant a particle that comprises a pluralityof (i.e. more than one) lipid molecules physically associated with eachother by intermolecular forces. The lipid nanoparticles may be, e.g.,microspheres (including unilamellar and multilamellar vesicles, e.g.liposomes), a dispersed phase in an emulsion, micelles or an internalphase in a suspension.

The lipid nanoparticles have a size of about 1 to about 2,500 nm, about1 to about 1,500 nm, about 1 to about 1,000 nm, in a sub-embodimentabout 50 to about 600 nm, in a sub-embodiment about 50 to about 400 nm,in a sub-embodiment about 50 to about 250 nm, and in a sub-embodimentabout 50 to about 150 nm. Unless indicated otherwise, all sizes referredto herein are the average sizes (diameters) of the fully formednanoparticle, as measured by dynamic light scattering on a MalvernZetasizer. The nanoparticle sample is diluted in phosphate bufferedsaline (PBS) so that the count rate is approximately 200-400 kcts. Thedata is presented as a weighted average of the intensity measure.

One embodiment of the present invention provides for a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I) and another lipid component.Another embodiment provides for a lipid composition comprising acompound of formula (I) and a helper lipid, for example cholesterol.Another embodiment provides for a lipid composition comprising acompound of formula (I), a helper lipid, for example cholesterol, and aneutral lipid, for example DSPC. Another embodiment of the presentinvention provides for a lipid composition comprising a compound offormula (I), a helper lipid, for example cholesterol, a neutral lipid,for example DSPC, and a stealth lipid, for example PEG-DMG, S010 orS011. Another embodiment of the present invention provides for a lipidcomposition comprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, forexample cholesterol, a neutral lipid, for example DSPC, a stealth lipid,for example PEG-DMG, S010 or 5011, and a biologically active agent, forexample a siRNA. Another embodiment of the present invention providesfor a lipid nanoparticle comprising a compound of formula (I) a helperlipid, for example cholesterol, a neutral lipid, for example DSPC, and astealth lipid, for example PEG-DMG, S010 or S011, and a biologicallyactive agent, for example a siRNA.

Embodiments of the present invention also provide lipid compositionsdescribed according to the respective molar ratios of the componentlipids in the formulation, wherein a slash (“/”) indicates therespective components, as provided herein.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I) and a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, in a lipid molar ratio of 55-40 compound of formula(I)/55-40 helper lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipidcomposition comprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, forexample cholesterol, and a neutral lipid, for example DPSC in a lipidmolar ratio of 55-40 compound of formula (I)/55-40 helper lipid/15-5neutral lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, a neutral lipid, for example DSPC, and a stealth lipid, forexample PEG-DMG, S010 or S011 in a lipid molar ratio of 55-40 compoundof formula (I)/55-40 helper lipid/15-5 neutral lipid/10-1 stealth lipid.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I) and a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, in a lipid molar ratio of 50-40 compound of formula(I)/50-40 helper lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipidcomposition comprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, forexample cholesterol, and a neutral lipid, for example DPSC in a lipidmolar ratio of 50-40 compound of formula (I)/50-40 helper lipid/15-5neutral lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, a neutral lipid, for example DSPC, a stealth lipid, forexample PEG-DMG, S010 or S011 in a lipid molar ratio of 50-40 compoundof formula (I)/50-40 helper lipid/15-5 neutral lipid/5-1 stealth lipid.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I) and a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, in a lipid molar ratio of 47-43 compound of formula(I)/47-43 helper lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipidcomposition comprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, forexample cholesterol, and a neutral lipid, for example DPSC in a lipidmolar ratio of 47-43 compound of formula (I)/47-43 helper lipid/12-7neutral lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, a neutral lipid, for example DSPC, a stealth lipid, forexample PEG-DMG, S010 or S011 in a lipid molar ratio of 47-43 compoundof formula (I)/47-43 helper lipid/12-7 neutral lipid/4-1 stealth lipid.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a lipid compositioncomprising a compound of formula (I) and a helper lipid, for examplecholesterol, in a lipid molar ratio of about 45 compound of formula(I)/about 44 helper lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipidcomposition comprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, forexample cholesterol, and a neutral lipid, for example DPSC in a lipidmolar ratio of about 45 compound of formula (I)/about 44 helperlipid/about 9 neutral lipid. Another embodiment provides for a lipidcomposition comprising a compound of formula (I), a helper lipid, forexample cholesterol, a neutral lipid, for example DSPC, a stealth lipid,for example PEG-DMG, S010 or S011 in a lipid molar ratio of about 45compound of formula (I)/about 44 helper lipid/about 9 neutrallipid/about 2 stealth lipid, for example PEG-DMG, S010 or S011.

Preferred compounds of formula (I) for use in the above lipidcompositions are given in Examples 38, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 47, 52, 62,63, 92, 93, 94 and 112. Particularly preferred compounds are given inExamples 38 and 52. Preferred biologically active agents are siRNA's.

Lipid compositions of the present invention can be further optimized byone skilled in the art by combining cationic lipids with the desired pKarange, stealth lipids, helper lipids, and neutral lipids intoformulations, including, e.g., liposome formulations, lipidnanoparticles (LNP) formulations, and the like for delivery to specificcells and tissues in vivo. In one embodiment, further optimization isobtained by adjusting the lipid molar ratio between these various typesof lipids. In one embodiment, further optimization is obtained byadjusting one or more of: the desired particle size, N/P ratio,formulation methods and/or dosing regimen (e.g., number of dosesadministered over time, actual dose in mg/kg, timing of the doses,combinations with other therapeutics, etc.). The various optimizationtechniques known to those of skill in the art pertaining to the abovelisted embodiments are considered as part of this invention.

General Methods for Making Lipid Nanoparticles

The following methods can be used to make lipid nanoparticles of theinvention. To achieve size reduction and/or to increase the homogeneityof size in the particles, the skilled person may use the method stepsset out below, experimenting with different combinations. Additionally,the skilled person could employ sonication, filtration or other sizingtechniques which are used in liposomal formulations.

The process for making a composition of the invention typicallycomprises providing an aqueous solution, such as citrate buffer,comprising a biologically active agent in a first reservoir, providing asecond reservoir comprising an organic solution, such as an organicalcohol, for example ethanol, of the lipid(s) and then mixing theaqueous solution with the organic lipid solution. The first reservoir isoptionally in fluid communication with the second reservoir. The mixingstep is optionally followed by an incubation step, a filtration step,and a dilution and/or concentration step. The incubation step comprisesallowing the solution from the mixing step to stand in a vessel forabout 0 to about 100 hours (preferably about 0 to about 24 hours) atabout room temperature and optionally protected from light. In oneembodiment, a dilution step follows the incubation step. The dilutionstep may involve dilution with aqueous buffer (e.g. citrate buffer)e.g., using a pumping apparatus (e.g. a peristaltic pump). Thefiltration step is ultrafiltration. Ultrafiltration comprisesconcentration of the diluted solution followed by diafiltration, e.g.,using a suitable pumping system (e.g. pumping apparatus such as aperistaltic pump or equivalent thereof) in conjunction with a suitableultrafiltration membrane (e.g. GE Hollow fiber cartridges orequivalent).

In one embodiment, the mixing step provides a clear single phase.

In one embodiment, after the mixing step, the organic solvent is removedto provide a suspension of particles, wherein the biologically activeagent is encapsulated by the lipid(s), e.g. in a lipid bilayer.

The selection of an organic solvent will typically involve considerationof solvent polarity and the ease with which the solvent can be removedat the later stages of particle formation. The organic solvent, which isalso used as a solubilizing agent, is preferably in an amount sufficientto provide a clear single phase mixture of biologically active agentsand lipids. The organic solvent may be selected from one or more (e.g.two) of chloroform, dichloromethane, diethylether, cyclohexane,cyclopentane, benzene, toluene, methanol, and other aliphatic alcohols(e.g. C₁ to C₈) such as ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol,tert-butanol, iso-butanol, pentanol and hexanol.

The mixing step can take place by any number of methods, e.g., bymechanical means such as a vortex mixer.

The methods used to remove the organic solvent will typically involvediafilitration or evaporation at reduced pressures or blowing a streamof inert gas (e.g. nitrogen or argon) across the mixture.

In other embodiments, the method further comprises adding nonlipidpolycations which are useful to effect the transformation of cells usingthe present compositions. Examples of suitable nonlipid polycationsinclude, but are limited to, hexadimethrine bromide (sold under thebrandname POLYBRENE®, from Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis., USA)or other salts of hexadimethrine. Other suitable polycations include,e.g., salts of poly-L-ornithine, poly-L-arginine, poly-L-lysine,poly-D-lysine, polyallylamine and polyethyleneimine. In certainembodiments, the formation of the lipid nanoparticles can be carried outeither in a mono-phase system (e.g. a Bligh and Dyer monophase orsimilar mixture of aqueous and organic solvents) or in a two-phasesystem with suitable mixing.

The lipid nanoparticle may be formed in a mono- or a bi-phase system. Ina mono-phase system, the cationic lipid(s) and biologically active agentare each dissolved in a volume of the mono-phase mixture. Combining thetwo solutions provides a single mixture in which the complexes form. Ina bi-phase system, the cationic lipids bind to the biologically activeagent (which is present in the aqueous phase), and “pull” it into theorganic phase. In one embodiment, the lipid nanoparticles are preparedby a method which comprises: (a) contacting the biologically activeagent with a solution comprising noncationic lipids and a detergent toform a compound-lipid mixture; (b) contacting cationic lipids with thecompound-lipid mixture to neutralize a portion of the negative charge ofthe biologically active agent and form a charge-neutralized mixture ofbiologically active agent and lipids; and (c) removing the detergentfrom the charge-neutralized mixture.

In one group of embodiments, the solution of neutral lipids anddetergent is an aqueous solution. Contacting the biologically activeagent with the solution of neutral lipids and detergent is typicallyaccomplished by mixing together a first solution of the biologicallyactive agent and a second solution of the lipids and detergent.Preferably, the biologically active agent solution is also a detergentsolution. The amount of neutral lipid which is used in the presentmethod is typically determined based on the amount of cationic lipidused, and is typically of from about 0.2 to 5 times the amount ofcationic lipid, preferably from about 0.5 to about 2 times the amount ofcationic lipid used.

The biologically active agent-lipid mixture thus formed is contactedwith cationic lipids to neutralize a portion of the negative chargewhich is associated with the molecule of interest (or other polyanionicmaterials) present. The amount of cationic lipids used is typically theamount sufficient to neutralize at least 50% of the negative charge ofthe biologically active agent. Preferably, the negative charge will beat least 70% neutralized, more preferably at least 90% neutralized.

The methods used to remove the detergent typically involve dialysis.When organic solvents are present, removal is typically accomplished bydiafilitration or evaporation at reduced pressures or by blowing astream of inert gas (e.g. nitrogen or argon) across the mixture.

There is herein disclosed an apparatus for making a composition of thepresent invention. The apparatus typically includes a first reservoirfor holding an aqueous solution comprising a biologically active agentand a second reservoir for holding an organic lipid solution. Theapparatus also typically includes a pump mechanism configured to pumpthe aqueous and the organic lipid solutions into a mixing region ormixing chamber at substantially equal flow rates. In one embodiment, themixing region or mixing chamber comprises a T coupling or equivalentthereof, which allows the aqueous and organic fluid streams to combineas input into the T connector and the resulting combined aqueous andorganic solutions to exit out of the T connector into a collectionreservoir or equivalent thereof.

Methods for Delivering Biologically Active Agents and the Treatment ofDisease

The cationic lipids of formula (I) and lipid compostions thereof areuseful in pharmaceutical compositions or formulations used for deliveryof biologically active agents. Formulations containing cationic lipidsof formula (I) or lipid compositions thereof may be in various forms,including, but not limited to, particle forming delivery agentsincluding microparticles, nanoparticles and transfection agents that areuseful for delivering various molecules to cells. Specific formulationsare effective at transfecting or delivering biologically active agents,such as antibodies (e.g., monoclonal, chimeric, humanized, nanobodies,and fragments thereof etc.), cholesterol, hormones, peptides, proteins,chemotherapeutics and other types of antineoplastic agents, lowmolecular weight drugs, vitamins, co-factors, nucleosides, nucleotides,oligonucleotides, enzymatic nucleic acids, antisense nucleic acids,triplex forming oligonucleotides, antisense DNA or RNA compositions,chimeric DNA:RNA compositions, allozymes, aptamers, ribozyme, decoys andanalogs thereof, plasmids and other types of expression vectors, andsmall nucleic acid molecules, RNAi agents, short interfering nucleicacid (siNA), short interfering RNA (siRNA), double-stranded RNA (dsRNA),micro-RNA (miRNA), and short hairpin RNA (shRNA), molecules peptidenucleic acid (PNA), a locked nucleic acid ribonucleotide (LNA),morpholino nucleotide, threose nucleic acid (TNA), glycol nucleic acid(GNA), sisiRNA (small internally segmented interfering RNA), aiRNA(assymetrical interfering RNA), and siRNA with 1, 2 or more mismatchesbetween the sense and anti-sense strand to relevant cells and/ortissues, such as in a cell culture, subject or organism. The above listof biologically active agents is exemplary only, and is not intended tobe limiting. Such compounds may be purified or partially purified, andmay be naturally occuring or synthetic, and may be chemically modified.

Such formulations containing biologically active agents are useful,e.g., in providing compositions to prevent, inhibit, or treat diseases,conditions, or traits in a cell, subject or organism. Diseases,conditions or traits include, but are not limited to, proliferativediseases, including cancer, inflammatory disease, transplant and/ortissue rejection, autoimmune diseases or conditions, age-relateddisease, neurological or neurodegenerative disease, respiratory disease,cardiovascular disease, ocular disease, metabolic disease,dermatological disease, auditory disease, a liver disease, a kidney orrenal disease, etc.

The amount of active agent administered per dose is an amount above theminimal therapeutic dose but below a toxic dose. The actual amount perdose may be determined by a physician depending on a number of factors,such as the medical history of the patient, the use of other therapies,the biologically active agent to be provided, and the nature of thedisease.

The amount of biologically active agent administered may be adjustedthroughout treatment, depending on the patient's response to treatmentand the presence or severity of any treatment-associated side effects.Exemplary dosages and treatment for compounds that have been approved byan appropriate regulatory agency are known and available to thoseskilled in the art. See, e.g., Physician's Desk Reference, 64th ed.,Physician's Desk Reference Inc. (2010), Remington's PharmaceuticalSciences, Mack Publishing Company, Philadelphia, Pa. (1985), andRemington The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st ed., LippincottWilliams & Williams Publishers (2005).

In one embodiment, a single dose is administered of a biologicallyactive agent to a patient in need thereof. In one embodiment, multipledoses are administered, wherein the multiple doses may be administeredconcurrently, sequentially or alternating. In one embodiment, the sameformulation is administered over multiple doses. In one embodiment, theformulations differ over multiple doses. In various embodiments, thedoses may be administered once a day, or for one, two, three, four ormore consecutive days. In one embodiment, the doses are administeredonce a week. In one embodiment, the doses are administered once everyother week. In one embodiment, patients receive at least two courses ofa treatment regimen, and potentially more, depending on the response ofthe patient to the treatment. In single agent regimens, total courses oftreatment are determined by the patient and physician based on observedresponses and toxicity. The above dosage regimens are to be consideredas non-limiting examples. Other dosage regimens are contemplated asbeing within the scope of the invention, and depend on the therapeuticeffect desired.

The invention also provides a method for the treatment of a disease orcondition comprising the step of administering a therapeuticallyeffective amount of a lipid composition of the invention to a patient inneed of treatment thereof. In one embodiment, the disease or conditionis treatable by administering an siRNA agent.

The invention also provides for use of a lipid composition of theinvention in treating a disease or condition in a patient. In oneembodiment, the disease or condition is treatable by administering ansiRNA agent.

The total amount of lipid in the composition being administered is, inone embodiment, from about 5 to about 30 mg lipid per mg biologicallyactive agent (e.g. siRNA), in another embodiment from about 5 to about25 mg lipid per mg biologically active agent (e.g. siRNA), in anotherembodiment from about 7 to about 25 mg lipid per mg biologically activeagent (e.g. siRNA) and in one embodiment from about 7 to about 15 mglipid per mg biologically active agent (e.g. siRNA).

As used herein, “treatment” includes ameliorative, curative andprophylactic treatment. As used herein, a “patient” means an animal,preferably a mammal, preferably a human, in need of treatment.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” refers to the amount of thecompound of the invention and the biologically active agent (e.g. thetherapeutic compound) needed to treat or ameliorate a targeted diseaseor condition.

The term “immunologically effective amount” refers to the amount of thecompound of the invention and of RNA which encodes an immunogen neededto elicit an immune response which recognizes the immunogen (e.g. in thecontext of a pathogen). The term “immunogen” refers to any substance ororganism that provokes an immune response when introduced into the body.The phrase “RNA which encodes an immunogen” refers to a polynucleotide,such as a messenger RNA or a replicon, that a cell or organism iscapable of translating into a polypeptide according to the codonsequence of such RNA.

By “proliferative disease” as used herein is meant any disease,condition, trait, genotype or phenotype characterized by unregulatedcell growth or replication as is known in the art. In one embodiment,the proliferative disease is cancer. In one embodiment, theproliferative disease is a tumor. In one embodiment, the proliferativedisease includes, but are not limited to, e.g., liquid tumors such as,e.g., leukemias, e.g., acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), chronicmyelogenous leukemia (CML), acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL), multiplemyeloma, and chronic lymphocytic leukemia; and solid tumors, e.g., AIDSrelated cancers such as Kaposi's sarcoma; breast cancers; bone cancers;brain cancers; cancers of the head and neck, non-Hodgkins lymphoma,adenoma, squamous cell carcinoma, laryngeal carcinoma, gallbladder andbile duct cancers, cancers of the retina, cancers of the esophagus,gastrointestinal cancers, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, thyroidcancer, testicular cancer, endometrial cancer, melanoma, colorectalcancer, lung cancer, bladder cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer(including non-small cell lung carcinoma), pancreatic cancer, sarcomas,Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, head and neck cancer, skin cancers,nasopharyngeal carcinoma, liposarcoma, epithelial carcinoma, renal cellcarcinoma, gallbladder adeno carcinoma, endometrial sarcoma, multidrugresistant cancers. In one embodiment, the proliferative disease includesneovascularization associated with tumor angiogenesis, maculardegeneration (e.g. wet/dry age related macular degeneration), cornealneovascularization, diabetic retinopathy, neovascular glaucoma, myopicdegeneration. In one embodiment, the proliferative disease includesrestenosis and polycystic kidney disease.

By “autoimmune disease” as used herein is meant any disease, condition,trait, genotype or phenotype characterized by autoimmunity as is knownin the art. Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, e.g.,multiple sclerosis, diabetes mellitus, lupus, scleroderms, fibromyalgia,transplantation rejection (e.g. prevention of allograft rejection),pernicious anemia, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus,dermatomyositis, myasthenia gravis, lupus erythematosus, multiplesclerosis, and Grave's disease.

By “infectious disease” is meant any disease, disorder or conditionassociated with an infectious agent, such as a virus, bacteria, fungus,prion or parasite. The invention can be used to immunize againstpathogens which cause infectious disease. Examples of such pathogens aregiven below.

By “neurologic disease” is meant any disease, disorder, or conditionaffecting the central or peripheral nervous system. Neurologic diseasesinclude, but are not limited to, diseases or disorders of either theperipheral or the central nervous system including, e.g., Alzheimer'sDisease, Aneurysm, Brain Injury, Carpal Tunnel Syndrome, CerebralAneurysm, Chronic Pain, Creutzfeldt-Jakob Disease, Epilepsy,Huntington's Disease, Meningitis, Seizure Disorders, and otherneurologic diseases, disorders and syndromes.

By “respiratory disease” is meant any disease or condition affecting therespiratory tract. Respiratory diseases include, but are not limited to,e.g., asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), allergicrhinitis, sinusitis, allergies, impeded respiration, respiratorydistress syndrome, cystic fibrosis, pulmonary hypertension orvasoconstriction and emphysema.

By “cardiovascular disease” is meant and disease or condition affectingthe heart and vasculature. Cardiovascular diseases include, but are notlimited to, e.g., coronary heart disease (CHD), cerebrovascular disease(CVD), aortic stenosis, peripheral vascular disease, myocardialinfarction (heart attack), arrhythmia, and congestive heart failure.

By “ocular disease” as used herein is meant any disease, condition,trait, genotype or phenotype of the eye and related structures. Oculardiseases include, but are not limited to, e.g., cystoid macular edema,diabetic retinopathy, lattice degeneration, retinal vein occlusion,retinal artery occlusion, macular degeneration (e.g. age related maculardegeneration such as wet AMD or dry AMD), toxoplasmosis, retinitispigmentosa, conjunctival laceration, corneal laceration, glaucoma, andthe like.

By “metabolic disease” is meant any disease or condition affectingmetabolic pathways. Metabolic disease can result in an abnormalmetabolic process, either congenital due to inherited enzyme abnormality(inborn errors of metabolism) or acquired due to disease of an endocrineorgan or failure of a metabolically important organ such as the liver.In one embodiment, metabolic disease includes obesity, insulinresistance, and diabetes (e.g. type I and/or type II diabetes).

By “dermatological disease” is meant any disease or condition of theskin, dermis, or any substructure therein such as a hair, a follicle,etc. Dermatological diseases, disorders, conditions, and traits caninclude psoriasis, ectopic dermatitis, skin cancers such as melanoma andbasal cell carcinoma, hair loss, hair removal and alterations inpigmentation.

By “auditory disease” is meant any disease or condition of the auditorysystem, including the ear, such as the inner ear, middle ear, outer ear,auditory nerve, and any substructures therein. Auditory diseases,disorders, conditions, and traits can include hearing loss, deafness,tinnitus, vertigo, balance and motion disorders.

The term “short interfering nucleic acid” (siNA) as used herein refersto any nucleic acid molecule capable of inhibiting or down regulatinggene expression or viral replication by mediating RNA interference(RNAi) or gene silencing in a sequence-specific manner. It includesshort interfering RNA (siRNA), microRNA (miRNA), short interferingoligonucleotides and chemically-modified short interfering nucleic acidmolecules. siRNAs are responsible for RNA interference, the process ofsequence-specific post-transcriptional gene silencing in animals andplants. siRNAs are generated by ribonuclease III cleavage from longerdouble-stranded RNA (dsRNA) which are homologous to, or specific to, thesilenced gene target.

The term “RNA interference” (RNAi) is a post-transcriptional, targetedgene-silencing technique that uses a RNAi agent to degrade messenger RNA(mRNA) containing a sequence which is the same as or very similar to theRNAi agent. See: Zamore and Haley, 2005, Science, 309, 1519-1524; Zamoreet al., 2000, Cell, 101, 25-33; Elbashir et al., 2001, Nature, 411,494-498; and Kreutzer et al., PCT Publication WO 00/44895; Fire, PCTPublication WO 99/32619; Mello and Fire, PCT Publication WO 01/29058;and the like.

As used herein, RNAi is equivalent to other terms used to describesequence specific RNA interference, such as post transcriptional genesilencing, translational inhibition, transcriptional inhibition, orepigenetics. For example, the formulations containing lipids of theinvention can be used in conjunction with siNA molecules toepigenetically silence genes at both the post-transcriptional leveland/or the pre-transcriptional level. In a non-limiting example,modulation of gene expression by siNA molecules can result from siNAmediated cleavage of RNA (either coding or non-coding RNA) via RISC, oralternately, translational inhibition as is known in the art. In anotherembodiment, modulation of gene expression by siNA can result fromtranscriptional inhibition such as is reported e.g., in Janowski et al.,2005, Nature Chemical Biology, 1,216-222.

The term “RNAi inhibitor” is any molecule that can down modulate (e.g.reduce or inhibit) RNA interference function or activity in a cell orpatient. An RNAi inhibitor can down regulate, reduce or inhibit RNAi(e.g. RNAi mediated cleavage of a target polynucleotide, translationalinhibition, or transcriptional silencing) by interaction with orinterfering with the function of any component of the RNAi pathway,including protein components such as RISC, or nucleic acid componentssuch as miRNAs or siRNAs. An RNAi inhibitor can be a siNA molecule, anantisense molecule, an aptamer, or a small molecule that interacts withor interferes with the function of RISC, a miRNA, or a siRNA or anyother component of the RNAi pathway in a cell or patient. By inhibitingRNAi (e.g. RNAi mediated cleavage of a target polynucleotide,translational inhibition, or transcriptional silencing), an RNAiinhibitor can be used to modulate (e.g, up-regulate or down-regulate)the expression of a target gene. In one embodiment, an RNA inhibitor isused to up-regulate gene expression by interfering with (e.g. reducingor preventing) endogenous down-regulation or inhibition of geneexpression through translational inhibition, transcriptional silencing,or RISC mediated cleavage of a polynucleotide (e.g. mRNA). Byinterfering with mechanisms of endogenous repression, silencing, orinhibition of gene expression, RNAi inhibitors of the invention cantherefore be used to up-regulate gene expression for the treatment ofdiseases or conditions resulting from a loss of function. The term “RNAiinhibitor” is used interchangeably with the term “siNA” in variousembodiments herein.

The term “enzymatic nucleic acid” as used herein refers to a nucleicacid molecule that has complementarity in a substrate binding region toa specified gene target, and also has an enzymatic activity that acts tospecifically cleave a target RNA, thereby inactivating the target RNAmolecule. The complementary regions allow sufficient hybridization ofthe enzymatic nucleic acid molecule to the target RNA and thus permitcleavage. Complementarity of 100% is preferred, but complementarity aslow as 50-75% can also be useful in this invention (see e.g., Werner andUhlenbeck, 1995, Nucleic Acids Research, 23, 2092-2096; Hammann et al.,1999, Antisense and Nucleic Acid Drug Dev., 9, 25-31). The nucleic acidscan be modified at the base, sugar, and/or phosphate groups. The termenzymatic nucleic acid is used interchangeably with phrases such asribozymes, catalytic RNA, enzymatic RNA, catalytic DNA, aptazyme oraptamer-binding ribozyme, regulatable ribozyme, catalyticoligonucleotides, nucleozyme, DNAzyme, RNA enzyme, endoribonuclease,endonuclease, minizyme, leadzyme, oligozyme or DNA enzyme. All of theseterminologies describe nucleic acid molecules with enzymatic activity.The key features of an enzymatic nucleic acid molecule are that it has aspecific substrate binding site that is complementary to one or more ofthe target nucleic acid regions, and that it has nucleotide sequenceswithin or surrounding that substrate binding site that impart a nucleicacid cleaving and/or ligation activity to the molecule (see, e.g., Cechet al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,987,071; Cech et al., 1988, 260 JAMA 3030).Ribozymes and enzymatic nucleic acid molecules of the invention can bechemically modified, e.g., as described in the art and elsewhere herein.

The term “antisense nucleic acid”, as used herein, refers to anon-enzymatic nucleic acid molecule that binds to target RNA by means ofRNA-RNA or RNA-DNA or RNA-PNA (protein nucleic acid; Egholm et al., 1993Nature 365, 566) interactions and alters the activity of the target RNA(for a review, see Stein and Cheng, 1993 Science 261, 1004 and Woolf etal., U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,902). Antisense DNA can be synthesizedchemically or expressed via the use of a single stranded DNA expressionvector or equivalent thereof. Antisense molecules of the invention canbe chemically modified, e.g. as described in the art.

The term “RNase H activating region” as used herein, refers to a region(generally greater than or equal to 4-25 nucleotides in length,preferably from 5-11 nucleotides in length) of a nucleic acid moleculecapable of binding to a target RNA to form a non-covalent complex thatis recognized by cellular RNase H enzyme (see e.g., Arrow et al., U.S.Pat. No. 5,849,902; Arrow et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,989,912). The RNase Henzyme binds to the nucleic acid molecule-target RNA complex and cleavesthe target RNA sequence.

The term “2-5A antisense chimera” as used herein, refers to an antisenseoligonucleotide containing a 5′-phosphorylated 2′-5′-linked adenylateresidue. These chimeras bind to target RNA in a sequence-specific mannerand activate a cellular 2-5A-dependent ribonuclease that, in turn,cleaves the target RNA (Torrence et al., 1993 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA90, 1300; Silverman et al., 2000, Methods Enzymol., 313, 522-533; Playerand Torrence, 1998, Pharmacol. Ther., 78, 55-113). 2-5A antisensechimera molecules can be chemically modified, e.g. as described in theart.

The term “triplex forming oligonucleotides” as used herein, refers to anoligonucleotide that can bind to a double-stranded DNA in asequence-specific manner to form a triple-strand helix. Formation ofsuch triple helix structure has been shown to inhibit transcription ofthe targeted gene (Duval-Valentin et al., 1992 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.USA 89, 504; Fox, 2000, Curr. Med. Chem., 7, 17-37; Praseuth et. al.,2000, Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 1489, 181-206). Triplex formingoligonucleotide molecules of the invention can be chemically modified,e.g. as described in the art.

The term “decoy RNA” as used herein, refers to an RNA molecule oraptamer that is designed to preferentially bind to a predeterminedligand. Such binding can result in the inhibition or activation of atarget molecule. The decoy RNA or aptamer can compete with a naturallyoccurring binding target for the binding of a specific ligand.Similarly, a decoy RNA can be designed to bind to a receptor and blockthe binding of an effector molecule, or can be designed to bind toreceptor of interest and prevent interaction with the receptor. Decoymolecules of the invention can be chemically modified, e.g. as describedin the art.

The term “single stranded DNA” (ssDNA) as used herein refers to anaturally occurring or synthetic deoxyribonucleic acid moleculecomprising a linear single strand, e.g., a ssDNA can be a sense orantisense gene sequence or EST (Expressed Sequence Tag).

The term “allozyme” as used herein refers to an allosteric enzymaticnucleic acid molecule, including e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,834,186,5,741,679, 5,589,332, 5,871,914, and PCT publication Nos. WO 00/24931,WO 00/26226, WO 98/27104, and WO 99/29842.

The term “aptamer” as used herein is meant a polynucleotide compositionthat binds specifically to a target molecule, wherein the polynucleotidehas a sequence that differs from a sequence normally recognized by thetarget molecule in a cell. Alternately, an aptamer can be a nucleic acidmolecule that binds to a target molecule where the target molecule doesnot naturally bind to a nucleic acid. The target molecule can be anymolecule of interest. Aptamer molecules of the invention can bechemically modified, e.g. as described in the art.

Formulation of Lipid Compositions

For pharmaceutical use, the lipid compositions of the invention may beadministered by enteral or parenteral routes, including intravenous,intramuscular, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), oral,intranasal, rectal, vaginal, buccal, nasopharangeal, gastrointestinal orsublingual administration. The administration may be systemic ortopical. Topical administration may involve, e.g., catheterization,implantation, osmotic pumping, direct injection, dermal/transdermalapplication, stenting, ear/eye drops or portal vein administration. Thecompounds of formula (I) should be assessed for their biopharmaceuticalproperties, such as solubility and solution stability (across pH),permeability, etc., in order to select the most appropriate dosage formand route of administration for treatment of the proposed indication.

The compositions of the invention will generally, but not necessarily,be administered as a formulation in association with one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients. The term “excipient” includesany ingredient other than the compound(s) of the invention, the otherlipid component(s) and the biologically active agent. An excipient mayimpart either a functional (e.g drug release rate controlling) and/or anon-functional (e.g. processing aid or diluent) characteristic to theformulations. The choice of excipient will to a large extent depend onfactors such as the particular mode of administration, the effect of theexcipient on solubility and stability, and the nature of the dosageform.

Typical pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include:

diluents, e.g. lactose, dextrose, sucrose, mannitol, sorbitol, celluloseand/or glycine;

lubricants, e.g. silica, talcum, stearic acid, its magnesium or calciumsalt and/or polyethyleneglycol;

binders, e.g. magnesium aluminum silicate, starch paste, gelatin,tragacanth, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose and/orpolyvinylpyrrolidone;

disintegrants, e.g. starches, agar, alginic acid or its sodium salt, oreffervescent mixtures; and/or

absorbants, colorants, flavors and/or sweeteners.

The excipient may be an aqueous solution carrier which may optionallycontain a buffer (e.g. a PBS buffer) and/or a sugar.

A thorough discussion of pharmaceutically acceptable excipients isavailable in Gennaro, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy2000, 20th edition (ISBN: 0683306472).

The compositions of the invention may be administered orally. Oraladministration may involve swallowing, so that the compound enters thegastrointestinal tract, and/or buccal, lingual, or sublingualadministration by which the compound enters the blood stream directlyfrom the mouth.

The compositions of the invention can be administered parenterally. Thecompounds and compositions of the invention may be administered directlyinto the blood stream, into subcutaneous tissue, into muscle, or into aninternal organ. Suitable means for administration include intravenous,intraarterial, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral,intrasternal, intracranial, intramuscular, intrasynovial andsubcutaneous. Suitable devices for administration include needle(including microneedle) injectors, needle-free injectors and infusiontechniques.

Parenteral formulations are typically aqueous or oily solutions. Wherethe solution is aqueous, excipients such as sugars (including but notrestricted to glucose, mannitol, sorbitol, etc.) salts, carbohydratesand buffering agents (preferably to a pH of from 3 to 9), but, for someapplications, they may be more suitably formulated as a sterilenon-aqueous solution or as a dried form to be used in conjunction with asuitable vehicle such as sterile, pyrogen-free water (WFI).

Parenteral formulations may include implants derived from degradablepolymers such as polyesters (i.e. polylactic acid, polylactide,polylactide-co-glycolide, polycapro-lactone, polyhydroxybutyrate),polyorthoesters and polyanhydrides. These formulations may beadministered via surgical incision into the subcutaneous tissue,muscular tissue or directly into specific organs.

The preparation of parenteral formulations under sterile conditions,e.g., by lyophilisation, may readily be accomplished using standardpharmaceutical techniques well known to the skilled person.

The solubility of the compounds and compositions used in the preparationof parenteral solutions may be increased by the use of appropriateformulation techniques, such as the incorporation of co-solvents and/orsolubility-enhancing agents such as surfactants, micelle structures andcyclodextrins.

The compositions of the invention can be administered intranasally or byinhalation, typically in the form of a dry powder (either alone, as amixture, e.g., in a dry blend with lactose, or as a mixed componentparticle, e.g., mixed with phospholipids, such as phosphatidylcholine)from a dry powder inhaler, as an aerosol spray from a pressurisedcontainer, pump, spray, atomiser (preferably an atomiser usingelectrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist), or nebuliser, with orwithout the use of a suitable propellant, such as1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane or 1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane, or asnasal drops. For intranasal use, the powder may comprise a bioadhesiveagent, e.g., chitosan or cyclodextrin.

The pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, or nebuliser containsa solution or suspension of the compound(s) of the invention comprising,e.g., ethanol, aqueous ethanol, or a suitable alternative agent fordispersing, solubilising, or extending release of the compositions ofthe invention, a propellant(s) as solvent and an optional surfactant,such as sorbitan trioleate, oleic acid, or an oligolactic acid.

Prior to use in a dry powder or suspension formulation, the compositionis micronised to a size suitable for delivery by inhalation (typicallyless than 5 microns). This may be achieved by any appropriatecomminuting method, such as spiral jet milling, fluid bed jet milling,supercritical fluid processing to form nanoparticles, high pressurehomogenisation, or spray drying.

Capsules (made, e.g., from gelatin or hydroxypropylmethylcellulose),blisters and cartridges for use in an inhaler or insufflator may beformulated to contain a powder mix of the compound or composition of theinvention, a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch and aperformance modifier such as 1-leucine, mannitol, or magnesium stearate.The lactose may be anhydrous or in the form of the monohydrate,preferably the latter. Other suitable excipients include dextran,glucose, maltose, sorbitol, xylitol, fructose, sucrose and trehalose.

Formulations for inhaled/intranasal administration may be formulated tobe immediate and/or modified release using, e.g., PGLA. Modified releaseformulations include delayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-,targeted and programmed release.

Suitable formulations for transdermal application include atherapeutically effective amount of a compound or composition of theinvention with carrier. Advantageous carriers include absorbablepharmacologically acceptable solvents to assist passage through the skinof the host. Characteristically, transdermal devices are in the form ofa bandage comprising a backing member, a reservoir containing thecompound optionally with carriers, optionally a rate controlling barrierto deliver the compound to the skin of the host at a controlled andpredetermined rate over a prolonged period of time, and means to securethe device to the skin.

Lipid compositions of the invention are administered in any of a numberof ways, including parenteral, intravenous, systemic, local, oral,intratumoral, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, inhalation,or any such method of delivery. In one embodiment, the compositions areadministered parenterally, i.e., intraarticularly, intravenously,intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly. In a specificembodiment, the liposomal compositions are administered by intravenousinfusion or intraperitoneally by a bolus injection.

Lipid compositions of the invention can be formulated as pharmaceuticalcompositions suitable for delivery to a subject. The pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention will often further comprise one or morebuffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline),carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose, dextrose or dextrans),mannitol, proteins, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine,antioxidants, bacteriostats, chelating agents such as EDTA orglutathione, adjuvants (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), solutes that renderthe formulation isotonic, hypotonic or weakly hypertonic with the bloodof a recipient, suspending agents, thickening agents and/orpreservatives. Alternatively, compositions of the present invention maybe formulated as a lyophilizate.

Suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found,e.g., in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company,Philadelphia, Pa., 17.sup.th Ed. (1985). Often, intravenous compositionswill comprise a solution of the liposomes suspended in an acceptablecarrier, such as an aqueous carrier.

In one embodiment, this invention provides for a pharmaceuticalcomposition (i.e. formulation) comprising a lipid composition of theinvention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Inanother embodiment at least one other lipid component is present in thelipid composition. In another embodiment the lipid composition is in theform of a liposome. In another embodiment the lipid composition is inthe form of a lipid nanoparticle. In another embodiment the lipidcomposition is suitable for delivery to the liver. In another embodimentthe lipid composition is suitable for delivery to a tumor. In anotherembodiment the biologically active agent is a siRNA.

For immunization purposes a composition will generally be prepared as aninjectable, and will be administered by injection (e.g. by intramuscularinjection).

The invention also provides a delivery device (e.g. syringe, nebuliser,sprayer, inhaler, dermal patch, etc.) containing a composition of theinvention. This device can be used to administer a pharmaceuticalcomposition to a subject e.g. to a human for immunization.

Cells and Organs Targeted by the Invention

The compounds, compositions, methods and uses of the invention can beused to deliver a biologically active agent to one or more of thefollowing in a patient: the liver or liver cells (e.g. hepatocytes);

a kidney or kidney cells;

a tumor or tumor cells;

the CNS or CNS cells (Central Nervous System, e.g. brain and/or spinalcord);

the PNS or PNS cells (Peripheral Nervous System);

a lung or lung cells;

the vasculature or vascular cells;

the skin or skin cells (e.g. dermis cells and/or follicular cells);

an eye or ocular cells (e.g. macula, fovea, cornea, retina), and

an ear or cells of the ear (e.g. cells of the inner ear, middle earand/or outer ear).

The compounds, compositions, methods and uses of the invention can alsobe used to deliver a biologically active agent (e.g. RNA which encodesan immunogen) to cells of the immune system.

In one embodiment, the compounds, compositions, methods and uses of theinvention are for delivering a biologically active agent to liver cells(e.g. hepatocytes). In one embodiment, the compounds, compositions,methods and uses of the invention are for delivering a biologicallyactive agent to a tumor or to tumor cells (e.g. a primary tumor ormetastatic cancer cells).

For delivery of a biologically active agent to the liver or liver cells,in one embodiment a composition of the invention is contacted with theliver or liver cells of the patient as is generally known in the art,such as via parental administration (e.g. intravenous, intramuscular,subcutaneous administration) or local administration (e.g. directinjection, portal vein injection, catheterization, stenting), tofacilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to the kidney or kidneycells, in one embodiment a composition of the invention is contactedwith the kidney or kidney cells of the patient as is generally known inthe art, such as via parental administration (e.g. intravenous,intramuscular, subcutaneous administration) or local administration(e.g. direct injection, catheterization, stenting), to facilitatedelivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to a tumor or tumor cells,in one embodiment a composition of the invention is contacted with thetumor or tumor cells of the patient as is generally known in the art,such as via parental administration (e.g. intravenous, intramuscular,subcutaneous administration) or local administration (e.g. directinjection, catheterization, stenting), to facilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to the CNS or CNS cells(e.g. brain cells and/or spinal cord cells), in one embodiment acomposition of the invention is contacted with the CNS or CNS cells(e.g. brain cells and/or spinal cord cells) of the patient as isgenerally known in the art, such as via parental administration (e.g.intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous administration) or localadministration (e.g. direct injection, catheterization, stenting,osmotic pump administration (e.g. intrathecal or ventricular)), tofacilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to the PNS or PNS cells, inone embodiment a composition of the invention is contacted with the PNSor PNS cells of the patient as is generally known in the art, such asvia parental administration (e.g. intravenous, intramuscular,subcutaneous administration) or local administration (e.g. directinjection), to facilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to a lung or lung cells, inone embodiment a composition of the invention is contacted with the lungor lung cells of the patient as is generally known in the art, such asvia parental administration (e.g. intravenous, intramuscular,subcutaneous administration) or local administration (e.g. pulmonaryadministration directly to lung tissues and cells), to facilitatedelivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to the vasculature orvascular cells, in one embodiment a composition of the invention iscontacted with the vasculature or vascular cells of the patient as isgenerally known in the art, such as via parental administration (e.g.intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous administration) or localadministration (e.g. clamping, catheterization, stenting), to facilitatedelivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to the skin or skin cells(e.g. dermis cells and/or follicular cells), in one embodiment acomposition of the invention is contacted with the skin or skin cells(e.g. dermis cells and/or follicular cells) of the patient as isgenerally known in the art, such as via parental administration (e.g.intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous administration) or localadministration (e.g. direct dermal application, iontophoresis), tofacilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to an eye or ocular cells(e.g. macula, fovea, cornea, retina), in one embodiment a composition ofthe invention is contacted with the eye or ocular cells (e.g. macula,fovea, cornea, retina) of the patient as is generally known in the art,such as via parental administration (e.g. intravenous, intramuscular,subcutaneous administration) or local administration (e.g. directinjection, intraocular injection, periocular injection, subretinal,iontophoresis, use of eyedrops, implants), to facilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent to an ear or cells of theear (e.g. cells of the inner ear, middle ear and/or outer ear), in oneembodiment composition of the invention is contacted with the ear orcells of the ear (e.g. cells of the inner ear, middle ear and/or outerear) of the patient as is generally known in the art, such as viaparental administration (e.g. intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneousadministration) or local administration (e.g. direct injection), tofacilitate delivery.

For delivery of a biologically active agent (e.g. RNA encoding animmunogen) to cells of the immune system (e.g. antigen-presenting cells,including professional antigen presenting cells), in one embodimentcomposition of the invention is delivered intramuscularly, after whichimmune cells can infiltrate the delivery site and process delivered RNA.Such immune cells can include macrophages (e.g. bone marrow derivedmacrophages), dendritic cells (e.g. bone marrow derived plasmacytoiddendritic cells and/or bone marrow derived myeloid dendritic cells),monocytes (e.g. human peripheral blood monocytes), etc. (e.g. seeWO2012/006372).

Immunization According to the Invention

For immunization purposes, the invention involves delivering a RNA whichencodes an immunogen. The immunogen elicits an immune response whichrecognizes the immunogen, and so can be used to provide immunity againsta pathogen, or against an allergen, or against a tumor antigen.Immunising against disease and/or infection caused by a pathogen ispreferred.

The RNA is delivered with a lipid composition of the invention (e.g.with a liposome or LNP), and typically the invention utilises liposomesor LNPs within which immunogen-encoding RNA is encapsulated.Encapsulation within liposomes can protect RNA from RNase digestion.

In one embodiment the invention provides a liposome having a lipidbilayer encapsulating an aqueous core, wherein: (i) the lipid bilayercomprises a lipid of the invention; and (ii) the aqueous core includes aRNA which encodes an immunogen. If a composition comprises a populationof liposomes with different diameters, for immunization purposes it canbe useful if: (i) at least 80% by number of the liposomes have diametersin the range of 60-180 nm, and preferably in the range of 80-160 nm,and/or (ii) the average diameter (by intensity e.g. Z-average) of thepopulation is in the range of 60-180 nm, and preferably in the range of80-160 nm. The diameters within the plurality should ideally have apolydispersity index <0.2.

After in vivo administration of an immunization composition, thedelivered RNA is released and is translated inside a cell to provide theimmunogen in situ. The RNA is plus (“+”) stranded, so it can betranslated by cells without needing any intervening replication stepssuch as reverse transcription. It may also bind to TLR7 receptorsexpressed by immune cells, thereby initiating an adjuvant effect.

Preferred plus (+) stranded RNAs are self-replicating. Aself-replicating RNA molecule (replicon) can, when delivered to avertebrate cell even without any proteins, lead to the production ofmultiple daughter RNAs by transcription from itself (via an antisensecopy which it generates from itself). A self-replicating RNA molecule isthus typically a + strand molecule which can be directly translatedafter delivery to a cell, and this translation provides a RNA-dependentRNA polymerase which then produces both antisense and sense transcriptsfrom the delivered RNA. Thus the delivered RNA leads to the productionof multiple daughter RNAs. These daughter RNAs, as well as collinearsubgenomic transcripts, may be translated themselves to provide in situexpression of an encoded immunogen, or may be transcribed to providefurther transcripts with the same sense as the delivered RNA which aretranslated to provide in situ expression of the immunogen. The overallresult of this sequence of transcriptions is a huge amplification in thenumber of the introduced replicon RNAs and so the encoded immunogenbecomes a major polypeptide product of the cells.

One suitable system for achieving self-replication is to use analphavirus-based RNA replicon. These + stranded replicons are translatedafter delivery to a cell to give of a replicase (orreplicase-transcriptase). The replicase is translated as a polyproteinwhich auto cleaves to provide a replication complex which createsgenomic − strand copies of the + strand delivered RNA. These − strandtranscripts can themselves be transcribed to give further copies ofthe + stranded parent RNA and also to give a subgenomic transcript whichencodes the immunogen. Translation of the subgenomic transcript thusleads to in situ expression of the immunogen by the infected cell.Suitable alphavirus replicons can use a replicase from a sindbis virus,a semliki forest virus, an eastern equine encephalitis virus, aVenezuelan equine encephalitis virus, etc. Mutant or wild-type virusessequences can be used e.g. the attenuated TC83 mutant of VEEV has beenused in replicons.

A preferred self-replicating RNA molecule thus encodes (i) aRNA-dependent RNA polymerase which can transcribe RNA from theself-replicating RNA molecule and (ii) an immunogen. The polymerase canbe an alphavirus replicase e.g. comprising one or more of alphavirusproteins nsP1, nsP2, nsP3 and nsP4.

Whereas natural alphavirus genomes encode structural virion proteins inaddition to the non structural replicase polyprotein, it is preferredthat a self-replicating RNA molecule of the invention does not encodealphavirus structural proteins. Thus a preferred self replicating RNAcan lead to the production of genomic RNA copies of itself in a cell,but not to the production of RNA-containing virions. The inability toproduce these virions means that, unlike a wild-type alphavirus, theself-replicating RNA molecule cannot perpetuate itself in infectiousform. The alphavirus structural proteins which are necessary forperpetuation in wild-type viruses are absent from self replicating RNAsof the invention and their place is taken by gene(s) encoding theimmunogen of interest, such that the subgenomic transcript encodes theimmunogen rather than the structural alphavirus virion proteins.

Thus a self-replicating RNA molecule useful with the invention may havetwo open reading frames. The first (5′) open reading frame encodes areplicase; the second (3′) open reading frame encodes an immunogen. Insome embodiments the RNA may have additional (e.g. downstream) openreading frames e.g. to encode further immunogens (see below) or toencode accessory polypeptides.

A self-replicating RNA molecule can have a 5′ sequence which iscompatible with the encoded replicase.

Self-replicating RNA molecules can have various lengths but they aretypically 5000-25000 nucleotides long e.g. 8000-15000 nucleotides, or9000-12000 nucleotides. Thus the RNA is longer than seen in siRNAdelivery.

A RNA molecule may have a 5′ cap (e.g. a 7-methylguanosine). This capcan enhance in vivo translation of the RNA.

The 5′ nucleotide of a RNA molecule useful with the invention may have a5′ triphosphate group. In a capped RNA this may be linked to a7-methylguanosine via a 5′-to-5′ bridge. A 5′ triphosphate can enhanceRIG-I binding and thus promote adjuvant effects.

A RNA molecule may have a 3′ poly A tail. It may also include a poly Apolymerase recognition sequence (e.g. AAUAAA) near its 3′ end.

A RNA molecule useful with the invention for immunization purposes willtypically be single-stranded. Single-stranded RNAs can generallyinitiate an adjuvant effect by binding to TLR7, TLR8, RNA helicasesand/or PKR. RNA delivered in double-stranded form (dsRNA) can bind toTLR3, and this receptor can also be triggered by dsRNA which is formedeither during replication of a single-stranded RNA or within thesecondary structure of a single-stranded RNA.

RNA molecules for immunization purposes can conveniently be prepared byin vitro transcription (IVT). IVT can use a (cDNA) template created andpropagated in plasmid form in bacteria, or created synthetically (forexample by gene synthesis and/or polymerase chain-reaction (PCR)engineering methods). For instance, a DNA-dependent RNA polymerase (suchas the bacteriophage T7, T3 or SP6 RNA polymerases) can be used totranscribe the RNA from a DNA template. Appropriate capping and poly Aaddition reactions can be used as required (although the replicon'spoly-A is usually encoded within the DNA template). These RNApolymerases can have stringent requirements for the transcribed 5′nucleotide(s) and in some embodiments these requirements must be matchedwith the requirements of the encoded replicase, to ensure that the IVTtranscribed RNA can function efficiently as a substrate for itsself-encoded replicase.

As discussed in WO2011/005799, the self-replicating RNA can include (inaddition to any 5′ cap structure) one or more nucleotides having amodified nucleobase. For instance, a self-replicating RNA can includeone or more modified pyrimidine nucleobases, such as pseudouridineand/or 5 methylcytosine residues. In some embodiments, however, the RNAincludes no modified nucleobases, and may include no modifiednucleotides i.e. all of the nucleotides in the RNA are standard A, C, Gand U ribonucleotides (except for any 5′ cap structure, which mayinclude a 7′ methylguanosine). In other embodiments, the RNA may includea 5′ cap comprising a 7′ methylguanosine, and the first 1, 2 or 3 5′ribonucleotides may be methylated at the 2′ position of the ribose.

A RNA used with the invention for immunization purposes ideally includesonly phosphodiester linkages between nucleosides, but in someembodiments it can contain phosphoramidate, phosphorothioate, and/ormethylphosphonate linkages.

The amount of RNA per liposome can vary. The number of individualself-replicating RNA molecules per liposome is typically <50 e.g. <20,<10, <5, or 1-4 per liposome.

RNA molecules used with the invention for immunization purposes encode apolypeptide immunogen. After administration the RNA is translated invivo and the immunogen can elicit an immune response in the recipient.The immunogen may elicit an immune response against a pathogen (e.g. abacterium, a virus, a fungus or a parasite) but, in some embodiments, itelicits an immune response against an allergen or a tumor antigen. Theimmune response may comprise an antibody response (usually includingIgG) and/or a cell mediated immune response. The polypeptide immunogenwill typically elicit an immune response which recognises thecorresponding pathogen (or allergen or tumor) polypeptide, but in someembodiments the polypeptide may act as a mimotope to elicit an immuneresponse which recognises a saccharide. The immunogen will typically bea surface polypeptide e.g. an adhesin, a hemagglutinin, an envelopeglycoprotein, a spike glycoprotein, etc.

The RNA molecule can encode a single polypeptide immunogen or multiplepolypeptides. Multiple immunogens can be presented as a singlepolypeptide immunogen (fusion polypeptide) or as separate polypeptides.If immunogens are expressed as separate polypeptides from a repliconthen one or more of these may be provided with an upstream IRES or anadditional viral promoter element. Alternatively, multiple immunogensmay be expressed from a polyprotein that encodes individual immunogensfused to a short autocatalytic protease (e.g. foot-and-mouth diseasevirus 2A protein), or as inteins.

In some embodiments the immunogen elicits an immune response against oneof these bacteria:

-   -   Neisseria meningitidis: useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, membrane proteins such as adhesins,        autotransporters, toxins, iron acquisition proteins, and factor        H binding protein. A combination of three useful polypeptides is        disclosed in Giuliani et al. (2006) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA        103(29):10834-9.    -   Streptococcus pneumoniae: useful polypeptide immunogens are        disclosed in WO2009/016515. These include, but are not limited        to, the RrgB pilus subunit, the beta-N-acetyl-hexosaminidase        precursor (spr0057), spr0096, General stress protein GSP-781        (spr2021, SP2216), serine/threonine kinase StkP (SP1732), and        pneumococcal surface adhesin PsaA.    -   Streptococcus pyogenes: useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, the polypeptides disclosed in WO02/34771 and        WO2005/032582.    -   Moraxella catarrhalis.    -   Bordetella pertussis: Useful pertussis immunogens include, but        are not limited to, pertussis toxin or toxoid (PT), filamentous        haemagglutinin (FHA), pertactin, and agglutinogens 2 and 3.    -   Staphylococcus aureus: Useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, the polypeptides disclosed in WO2010/119343, such as        a hemolysin, esxA, esxB, ferrichrome-binding protein (sta006)        and/or the sta011 lipoprotein.    -   Clostridium tetani: the typical immunogen is tetanus toxoid.    -   Cornynebacterium diphtheriae: the typical immunogen is        diphtheria toxoid.    -   Haemophilus influenzae: Useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, the polypeptides disclosed in WO2006/110413 and        WO2005/111066.    -   Pseudomonas aeruginosa    -   Streptococcus agalactiae: useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, the polypeptides disclosed in WO02/34771.    -   Chlamydia trachomatis: Useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, PepA, LcrE, ArtJ, DnaK, CT398, OmpH-like, L7/L12,        OmcA, AtoS, CT547, Eno, HtrA and MurG (e.g. as disclosed in        WO2005/002619). LcrE (WO2006/138004) and HtrA (WO2009/109860)        are two preferred immunogens.    -   Chlamydia pneumoniae: Useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, the polypeptides disclosed in WO02/02606.    -   Helicobacter pylori: Useful immunogens include, but are not        limited to, CagA, VacA, NAP, and/or urease (WO03/018054).    -   Escherichia coli: Useful immunogens include, but are not limited        to, immunogens derived from enterotoxigenic E. coli (ETEC),        enteroaggregative E. coli (EAggEC), diffusely adhering E. coli        (DAEC), enteropathogenic E coli (EPEC), extraintestinal        pathogenic E. coli (ExPEC) and/or enterohemorrhagic E. coli        (EHEC). ExPEC strains include uropathogenic E. coli (UPEC) and        meningitis/sepsis-associated E. coli (MNEC). Useful UPEC        immunogens are disclosed in WO2006/091517 and WO2008/020330.        Useful MNEC immunogens are disclosed in WO2006/089264. A useful        immunogen for several E. coli types is AcfD (WO02009/104092).    -   Bacillus anthracis    -   Yersinia pestis: Useful immunogens include, but are not limited        to, those disclosed in WO2007/049155 and WO2009/031043.    -   Staphylococcus epidermis    -   Clostridium perfringens or Clostridium botulinums    -   Legionella pneumophila    -   Coxiella burnetii    -   Brucella, such as B. abortus, B. canis, B. melitensis, B.        neotomae, B. ovis, B. suis, B. pinnipediae.    -   Francisella, such as F. novicida, F. philomiragia, F.        tularensis.    -   Neisseria gonorrhoeae    -   Treponema pallidum    -   Haemophilus ducreyi    -   Enterococcus faecalis or Enterococcus faecium    -   Staphylococcus saprophyticus    -   Yersinia enterocolitica    -   Mycobacterium tuberculosis    -   Rickettsia    -   Listeria monocytogenes    -   Vibrio cholerae    -   Salmonella typhi    -   Borrelia burgdorferi    -   Porphyromonas gingivalis    -   Klebsiella

In some embodiments the immunogen elicits an immune response against oneof these viruses:

-   -   Orthomyxovirus: Useful immunogens can be from an influenza A, B        or C virus, such as the hemagglutinin, neuraminidase or matrix        M2 proteins. Where the immunogen is an influenza A virus        hemagglutinin it may be from any subtype e.g. H1, H2, H3, H4,        H5, H6, H7, H8, H9, H10, H11, H12, H13, H14, H15 or H16.    -   Paramyxoviridae viruses: immunogens include, but are not limited        to, those derived from Pneumoviruses (e.g. respiratory syncytial        virus, RSV), Rubulaviruses (e.g. mumps virus), Paramyxoviruses        (e.g. parainfluenza virus), Metapneumoviruses and        Morbilliviruses (e.g. measles virus).    -   Poxviridae: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from Orthopoxvirus such as Variola vera, including but        not limited to, Variola major and Variola minor.    -   Picornavirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from Picornaviruses, such as Enteroviruses,        Rhinoviruses, Heparnavirus, Cardioviruses and Aphthoviruses. In        one embodiment, the enterovirus is a poliovirus e.g. a type 1,        type 2 and/or type 3 poliovirus. In another embodiment, the        enterovirus is an EV71 enterovirus. In another embodiment, the        enterovirus is a coxsackie A or B virus.    -   Bunyavirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from an Orthobunyavirus, such as California encephalitis        virus, a Phlebovirus, such as Rift Valley Fever virus, or a        Nairovirus, such as Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever virus.    -   Heparnavirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a Heparnavirus, such as hepatitis A virus (HAV).    -   Filovirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a filovirus, such as an Ebola virus (including a        Zaire, Ivory Coast, Reston or Sudan ebolavirus) or a Marburg        virus.    -   Togavirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a Togavirus, such as a Rubivirus, an Alphavirus, or        an Arterivirus. This includes rubella virus.    -   Flavivirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a Flavivirus, such as Tick-borne encephalitis (TBE)        virus, Dengue (types 1, 2, 3 or 4) virus, Yellow Fever virus,        Japanese encephalitis virus, Kyasanur Forest Virus, West Nile        encephalitis virus, St. Louis encephalitis virus, Russian        spring-summer encephalitis virus, Powassan encephalitis virus.    -   Pestivirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a Pestivirus, such as Bovine viral diarrhea (BVDV),        Classical swine fever (CSFV) or Border disease (BDV).    -   Hepadnavirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a Hepadnavirus, such as Hepatitis B virus. A        composition can include hepatitis B virus surface antigen        (HBsAg).    -   Other hepatitis viruses: A composition can include an immunogen        from a hepatitis C virus, delta hepatitis virus, hepatitis E        virus, or hepatitis G virus.    -   Rhabdovirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a Rhabdovirus, such as a Lyssavirus (e.g. a Rabies        virus) and Vesiculovirus (VSV).    -   Caliciviridae: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from Calciviridae, such as Norwalk virus (Norovirus),        and Norwalk-like Viruses, such as Hawaii Virus and Snow Mountain        Virus.    -   Coronavirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a SARS coronavirus, avian infectious bronchitis        (IBV), Mouse hepatitis virus (MHV), and Porcine transmissible        gastroenteritis virus (TGEV). The coronavirus immunogen may be a        spike polypeptide.    -   Retrovirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from an Oncovirus, a Lentivirus (e.g. HIV-1 or HIV-2) or        a Spumavirus.    -   Reovirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from an Orthoreovirus, a Rotavirus, an Orbivirus, or a        Coltivirus.    -   Parvovirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from Parvovirus B19.    -   Herpesvirus: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from a human herpesvirus, such as, by way of example        only, Herpes Simplex Viruses (HSV) (e.g. HSV types 1 and 2),        Varicella-zoster virus (VZV), Epstein-Barr virus (EBV),        Cytomegalovirus (CMV), Human Herpesvirus 6 (HHV6), Human        Herpesvirus 7 (HHV7), and Human Herpesvirus 8 (HHV8).    -   Papovaviruses: immunogens include, but are not limited to, those        derived from Papillomaviruses and Polyomaviruses. The (human)        papillomavirus may be of serotype 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11, 13, 16,        18, 31, 33, 35, 39, 41, 42, 47, 51, 57, 58, 63 or 65 e.g. from        one or more of serotypes 6, 11, 16 and/or 18.    -   Adenovirus: immunogens include those derived from serotype 36        (Ad-36).

In some embodiments, the immunogen elicits an immune response against avirus which infects fish, such as: infectious salmon anemia virus(ISAV), salmon pancreatic disease virus (SPDV), infectious pancreaticnecrosis virus (IPNV), channel catfish virus (CCV), fish lymphocystisdisease virus (FLDV), infectious hematopoietic necrosis virus (IHNV),koi herpesvirus, salmon picorna-like virus (also known as picorna-likevirus of atlantic salmon), landlocked salmon virus (LSV), atlanticsalmon rotavirus (ASR), trout strawberry disease virus (TSD), cohosalmon tumor virus (CSTV), or viral hemorrhagic septicemia virus (VHSV).

Fungal immunogens may be derived from Dermatophytres, including:Epidermophyton floccusum, Microsporum audouini, Microsporum canis,Microsporum distortum, Microsporum equinum, Microsporum gypsum,Microsporum nanum, Trichophyton concentricum, Trichophyton equinum,Trichophyton gallinae, Trichophyton gypseum, Trichophyton megnini,Trichophyton mentagrophytes, Trichophyton quinckeanum, Trichophytonrubrum, Trichophyton schoenleini, Trichophyton tonsurans, Trichophytonverrucosum, T. verrucosum var. album, var. discoides, var. ochraceum,Trichophyton violaceum, and/or Trichophyton faviforme; or fromAspergillus fumigatus, Aspergillus flavus, Aspergillus niger,Aspergillus nidulans, Aspergillus terreus, Aspergillus sydowii,Aspergillus flavatus, Aspergillus glaucus, Blastoschizomyces capitatus,Candida albicans, Candida enolase, Candida tropicalis, Candida glabrata,Candida krusei, Candida parapsilosis, Candida stellatoidea, Candidakusei, Candida parakwsei, Candida lusitaniae, Candida pseudotropicalis,Candida guilliermondi, Cladosporium carrionii, Coccidioides immitis,Blastomyces dermatidis, Cryptococcus neoformans, Geotrichum clavatum,Histoplasma capsulatum, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Microsporidia,Encephalitozoon spp., Septata intestinalis and Enterocytozoon bieneusi;the less common are Brachiola spp, Microsporidium spp., Nosema spp.,Pleistophora spp., Trachipleistophora spp., Vittaforma sppParacoccidioides brasiliensis, Pneumocystis carinii, Pythiumninsidiosum, Pityrosporum ovale, Sacharomyces cerevisae, Saccharomycesboulardii, Saccharomyces pombe, Scedosporium apiosperum, Sporothrixschenckii, Trichosporon beigelii, Toxoplasma gondii, Penicilliummarneffei, Malassezia spp., Fonsecaea spp., Wangiella spp., Sporothrixspp., Basidiobolus spp., Conidiobolus spp., Rhizopus spp, Mucor spp,Absidia spp, Mortierella spp, Cunninghamella spp, Saksenaea spp.,Alternaria spp, Curvularia spp, Helminthosporium spp, Fusarium spp,Aspergillus spp, Penicillium spp, Monolinia spp, Rhizoctonia spp,Paecilomyces spp, Pithomyces spp, and Cladosporium spp.

In some embodiments the immunogen elicits an immune response against aparasite from the Plasmodium genus, such as P. falciparum, P. vivax, P.malariae or P. ovale. Thus the invention may be used for immunisingagainst malaria. In some embodiments the immunogen elicits an immuneresponse against a parasite from the Caligidae family, particularlythose from the Lepeophtheirus and Caligus genera e.g. sea lice such asLepeophtheirus salmonis or Caligus rogercresseyi.

In some embodiments the immunogen elicits an immune response against:pollen allergens (tree-, herb, weed-, and grass pollen allergens);insect or arachnid allergens (inhalant, saliva and venom allergens, e.g.mite allergens, cockroach and midges allergens, hymenopthera venomallergens); animal hair and dandruff allergens (from e.g. dog, cat,horse, rat, mouse, etc.); and food allergens (e.g. a gliadin). Importantpollen allergens from trees, grasses and herbs are such originating fromthe taxonomic orders of Fagales, Oleales, Pinales and platanaceaeincluding, but not limited to, birch (Betula), alder (Alnus), hazel(Corylus), hornbeam (Carpinus) and olive (Olea), cedar (Cryptomeria andJuniperus), plane tree (Platanus), the order of Poales including grassesof the genera Lolium, Phleum, Poa, Cynodon, Dactylis, Holcus, Phalaris,Secale, and Sorghum, the orders of Asterales and Urticales includingherbs of the genera Ambrosia, Artemisia, and Parietaria. Other importantinhalation allergens are those from house dust mites of the genusDermatophagoides and Euroglyphus, storage mite e.g. Lepidoglyphys,Glycyphagus and Tyrophagus, those from cockroaches, midges and flease.g. Blatella, Periplaneta, Chironomus and Ctenocepphalides, and thosefrom mammals such as cat, dog and horse, venom allergens including suchoriginating from stinging or biting insects such as those from thetaxonomic order of Hymenoptera including bees (Apidae), wasps(Vespidea), and ants (Formicoidae).

In some embodiments the immunogen is a tumor antigen selected from: (a)cancer-testis antigens such as NY-ESO-1, SSX2, SCP1 as well as RAGE,BAGE, GAGE and MAGE family polypeptides, for example, GAGE-1, GAGE-2,MAGE-1, MAGE-2, MAGE-3, MAGE-4, MAGE-5, MAGE-6, and MAGE-12 (which canbe used, for example, to address melanoma, lung, head and neck, NSCLC,breast, gastrointestinal, and bladder tumors; (b) mutated antigens, forexample, p53 (associated with various solid tumors, e.g., colorectal,lung, head and neck cancer), p21/Ras (associated with, e.g., melanoma,pancreatic cancer and colorectal cancer), CDK4 (associated with, e.g.,melanoma), MUM1 (associated with, e.g., melanoma), caspase-8 (associatedwith, e.g., head and neck cancer), CIA 0205 (associated with, e.g.,bladder cancer), HLA-A2-R1701, beta catenin (associated with, e.g.,melanoma), TCR (associated with, e.g., T-cell non-Hodgkins lymphoma),BCR-abl (associated with, e.g., chronic myelogenous leukemia),triosephosphate isomerase, KIA 0205, CDC-27, and LDLR-FUT; (c)over-expressed antigens, for example, Galectin 4 (associated with, e.g.,colorectal cancer), Galectin 9 (associated with, e.g., Hodgkin'sdisease), proteinase 3 (associated with, e.g., chronic myelogenousleukemia), WT 1 (associated with, e.g., various leukemias), carbonicanhydrase (associated with, e.g., renal cancer), aldolase A (associatedwith, e.g., lung cancer), PRAME (associated with, e.g., melanoma),HER-2/neu (associated with, e.g., breast, colon, lung and ovariancancer), mammaglobin, alpha-fetoprotein (associated with, e.g.,hepatoma), KSA (associated with, e.g., colorectal cancer), gastrin(associated with, e.g., pancreatic and gastric cancer), telomerasecatalytic protein, MUC-1 (associated with, e.g., breast and ovariancancer), G-250 (associated with, e.g., renal cell carcinoma), p53(associated with, e.g., breast, colon cancer), and carcinoembryonicantigen (associated with, e.g., breast cancer, lung cancer, and cancersof the gastrointestinal tract such as colorectal cancer); (d) sharedantigens, for example, melanoma-melanocyte differentiation antigens suchas MART-1/Melan A, gp100, MC1R, melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor,tyrosinase, tyrosinase related protein-1/TRP1 and tyrosinase relatedprotein-2/TRP2 (associated with, e.g., melanoma); (e) prostateassociated antigens such as PAP, PSA, PSMA, PSH-P1, PSM-P1, PSM-P2,associated with e.g., prostate cancer; (f) immunoglobulin idiotypes(associated with myeloma and B cell lymphomas, for example). In certainembodiments, tumor immunogens include, but are not limited to, p15,Hom/Mel-40, H-Ras, E2A-PRL, H4-RET, IGH-IGK, MYL-RAR, Epstein Barr virusantigens, EBNA, human papillomavirus (HPV) antigens, including E6 andE7, hepatitis B and C virus antigens, human T-cell lymphotropic virusantigens, TSP-180, p185erbB2, p180erbB-3, c-met, mn-23H1, TAG-72-4, CA19-9, CA 72-4, CAM 17.1, NuMa, K-ras, p16, TAGE, PSCA, CT7, 43-9F, 5T4,791 Tgp72, beta-HCG, BCA225, BTAA, CA 125, CA 15-3 (CA 27.29\BCAA), CA195, CA 242, CA-50, CAM43, CD68\KP1, CO-029, FGF-5, Ga733 (EpCAM),HTgp-175, M344, MA-50, MG7-Ag, MOV18, NB/70K, NY-CO-1, RCAS1, SDCCAG16,TA-90 (Mac-2 binding protein/cyclophilin C-associated protein), TAAL6,TAG72, TLP, TPS, and the like.

A pharmaceutical composition of the invention, particularly one usefulfor immunization, may include one or more small moleculeimmunopotentiators. For example, the composition may include a TLR2agonist (e.g. Pam3CSK4), a TLR4 agonist (e.g. an aminoalkylglucosaminide phosphate, such as E6020), a TLR7 agonist (e.g.imiquimod), a TLR8 agonist (e.g. resiquimod) and/or a TLR9 agonist (e.g.IC31). Any such agonist ideally has a molecular weight of <2000 Da. Suchagonist(s) can, in some embodiments, be encapsulated with the RNA insideliposomes, but in other embodiments they are unencapsulated.

EXAMPLES Cationic Lipids of Formula (I)

The following examples are intended to illustrate the invention and arenot to be construed as being limitations thereon. Temperatures are givenin degrees centigrade. If not mentioned otherwise, all evaporativeconcentrations are performed under reduced pressure, preferably betweenabout 15 mm Hg and 100 mm Hg (=20-133 mbar). The structure of finalproducts, intermediates and starting materials is confirmed by standardanalytical methods, e.g., microanalysis or spectroscopiccharacteristics, e.g., MS, IR, or NMR. Abbreviations used are thoseconventional in the art, some of which are defined below.

Flash column purification is preferably carried out on silica gel usingan appropriate eluent of isocratic or gradient composition.

HPLC analysis is performed on a Waters Atlantis dC18 column (4.6×150 mm,3 mm), with gradient elution (0% to 95% acetonitrile in water modifiedwith 0.1% v/v trifluoroacetic acid over 20 min and a flow rate of 1.4mL/min), unless otherwise described.

1H NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker Avance II 400 MHz spectrometer.All chemical shifts are reported in parts per million (δ) relative totetramethylsilane. The following abbreviations are used to denote signalpatterns: s=singlet, d=doublet, t=triplet, q=quartet, m=multiplet,br=broad. ES-MS data were recorded using a Waters LTC Premier massspectrometer with a dual electrospray ionization source on an Agilent1100 liquid chromatograph. Sulfadimethoxine [Sigma, m/z=311.0814 (M+1)]was used as a reference acquired through the LockSpray™ channel everythird scan. The mass accuracy of the system has been found to be <5 ppm.

Abbreviations

-   -   C Celsius    -   DCM dichloromethane    -   deg degrees    -   DIEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine    -   DIPEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine    -   DMAP 4-dimethylaminopyridine    -   DMF N,N-dimethylformamide    -   DMSO dimethylsulfoxide    -   EDC 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide    -   ES-MS electro spray mass spectroscopy    -   EtOAc ethyl acetate    -   EtOH ethanol    -   g gram    -   h hour(s)    -   HATU 2-(1H-7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium        hexafluorophosphate    -   HOBt hydroxybenzotriazole    -   HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography    -   kg kilogram    -   L liter    -   LAH lithium aluminum hydride    -   LC liquid chromatography    -   LCMS liquid chromatography and mass spectrometry    -   MeOH methanol    -   MS mass spectrometry    -   mbar millibar    -   min minutes    -   mL milliliter(s)    -   mm millimeter    -   μM micromolar    -   m/z mass to charge ratio    -   nm nanometer    -   nM nanomolar    -   N normal    -   NaOEt sodium ethyloxide    -   NMP N-methylpyrrolidone    -   NMR nuclear magnetic resonance    -   Pd/C palladium on carbon    -   PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂        1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(II)dichloride        dichloromethane complex    -   psi pounds per square inch    -   ppm parts per million    -   pTsOH p-toluenesulfonic acid    -   quin quintuplet    -   rac racemic    -   Rt retention time    -   TBAF tetrabutylammonium fluoride    -   TBDPS tert-butyldiphenylsilyl ether    -   TBTU O-(Benzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium        tetrafluoroborate    -   TCEP tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine    -   TEA triethylamine    -   TFA trifluoroacetic acid    -   THF tetrahydrofuran    -   THP tetrahydropyran    -   TLC thin layer chromatography    -   TMS-CN trimethylsilyl cyanide    -   TsOH tosylic acid

Synthesis of Example 1 Intermediate 1a:

To a flask containing DMF (40 mL) was added 3,5-dihydroxybenzaldehyde (2g, 14.2 mmol), potassium carbonate (5.88 g, 42.6 mmol) and oleylmesylate(11.3 g, 32.6 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated to 80 deg C.overnight with stirring. The reaction was cooled and water and EtOAcwere added. The organic layer was collected, washed with brine, anddried over magnesium sulfate. The mixture was filtered and the filtrateconcentrated under reduced pressure to a crude material that waspurified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 8.53 g ofthe desired product.

Rf=0.56 (silica, 10% EtOAc in heptanes, UV and cerium molybdate).

Example 1 Compound

Intermediate 1a (4 g, 6.26 mmol) was stirred in EtOH (25 mL) anddimethylamine hydrochloride (1.02 g, 12.5 mmol) was added followed byTEA (1.21 mL, 8.76 mmol) and titanium tetraisopropoxide (1.8 mL, 6.3mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 3 h at room temperature andsodium borohydride (355 mg, 9.39 mmol) was added in one portion. Themixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction wasquenched with 7 N ammonia in MeOH (8.94 mL, 62.6 mmol) and the resultingwhite slurry filtered through celite with a DCM wash. The filtrate wasconcentrated under reduced pressure to yield a crude material that waspurified on silica in 0 to 50% EtOAc in heptanes, providing 2.66 g ofthe desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.46 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.36 (t, J=2.5 Hz,1H), 5.41-5.31 (m, 4H), 3.93 (t, J=6.9 Hzm 4H), 3.34 (s, 2H), 2.24 (s,6H), 2.09-1.98 (m, 8H), 1.81-1.69 (m, 4H), 1.50-1.21 (m, 44H), 0.89 (t,J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=668.8 (MH+)

Examples 2-7 were prepared using methods similar to those employed forthe preparation of Example 1.

Example 2

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.46 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.44-5.30 (m, 8H), 3.93 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.34 (s, 2H), 2.78 (t,J=6.2 Hz, 4H), 2.24 (s, 6H), 2.13-1.99 (m, 8H), 1.81-1.71 (m, 4H),1.49-1.23 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=664.9 (MH+)

Example 3

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.46-6.44 (m, 2H), 6.38-6.34 (m, 1H),5.44-5.29 (m, 8H), 3.92 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.69-3.63 (m, 6H), 2.82-2.71(m, 8H), 2.12-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.82-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.51-1.22 (m, 32H), 0.90(t, J=6.9 Hz, 6H) ppm. ES-MS m/z=724.6 (MH+)

Example 4

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.52-6.47 (m, 2H), 6.36-6.32 (m, 1H),5.47-5.26 (m, 8H), 3.93 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 2.83-2.74 (m,4H), 2.57-2.47 (m, 4H), 2.14-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.86-1.70 (m, 8H), 1.52-1.21(m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=691.5 (MH+)

Example 5

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.49 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (t, J=2.1 Hz,1H), 5.33-5.47 (m, 7H), 4.46 (tt, J=6.7, 3.6 Hz, 1H), 3.94 (t, J=6.7 Hz,4H), 3.76-3.85 (m, 4H), 3.59 (d, J=10.3 Hz, 2H), 2.80 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H),2.00-2.12 (m, 8H), 1.78 (dtd, J=7.8, 6.8, 5.8 Hz, 4H), 1.41-1.51 (m,4H), 1.25-1.41 (m, 27H), 0.83-0.95 (m, J=6.8, 6.8 Hz, 5H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=692.5 (MH+)

Example 6

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.50 (s, 2H), 6.36 (s, 1H), 5.39-5.32 (m, 4H),4.18 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.92 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.60 (s, 2H), 3.24 (s,2H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 2.10-1.95 (m, 8H), 1.80-1.60 (m, 4H), 1.50-1.15 (m,47H), 0.88 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=740.9 (MH+)

Example 7

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.53 (s, 2H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 5.38-5.30 (m, 4H),3.92 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.62 (s, br, 2H), 2.62 (m, 4H), 2.10-1.95 (m,8H), 1.90-1.80 (m, 4H), 1.80-1.65 (m, 4H), 1.50-1.20 (m, 43H), 0.87 (t,J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=694.9 (MH+)

Synthesis of Example 8

To a solution of the compound from Example 6 (160 mg, 0.22 mmol) indioxane (7 mL) was added 50% HCl in water (6.57 mL). The mixture washeated to reflux overnight and then cooled to room temperature. Thevolatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting materialpurified using strong cation exchange resin followed by columnchromatography on silica using DCM/MeOH as eluent, providing 123 mg ofthe desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 10.34 (s, br, 1H), 6.57 (s, 2H), 6.42 (s, 1H),5.38-5.30 (m, 4H), 4.17 (s, 2H), 3.87 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.51 (s, 2H),2.77 (s, 3H), 2.10-1.95 (m, 8H), 1.80-1.60 (m, 4H), 1.50-1.15 (m, 44H),0.87 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

¹³C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 168.6, 160.6, 132.3, 129.9, 129.7, 109.0,101.8, 68.1, 60.0, 57.6, 41.1, 31.8, 29.7, 29.5, 29.5, 29.4, 29.4, 29.2,29.2, 27.2, 26.0, 22.6, 14.1 ppm□

Synthesis of Example 9 Intermediate 9a:

To Intermediate 1a (1 g, 1.56 mmol) in MePh (30 mL) was added TBDPSprotected glycerol (0.52 g, 1.56 mmol) and TsOH monohydrate (0.03 g,0.16 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux overnight and then cooledto room temperature. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressureand the resulting material purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc aseluent, providing 1.28 g of a mixture containing the desired product.

Rf=0.45 (silica, 10% EtOAc in heptanes, UV and cerium molybdate)

Intermediate 9b:

To a solution of Intermediate 9a (1.28 g, 1.34 mmol) in THF (10 mL) wasadded TBAF (9.9 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 9.93 mmol). The resulting solution wasstirred overnight at room temperature. The volatiles were removed underreduced pressure and the resulting material purified on silica usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 638 mg (67%) of the desired product.

Rf=0.65 (silica, 50% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate)

Intermediate 9c:

To a solution of Intermediate 9b (638 mg, 0.895 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) wasadded DIEA (0.78 mL, 4.5 mmol) and MsCl (0.35 mL, 4.5 mmol). Theresulting solution was stirred for 30 min.

The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resultingmaterial was used without further purification.

ES-MS m/z=791.4 (MH+).

Example 9 Compound

A solution of Intermediate 9c (708 mg, 0.895 mmol) was dissolved inpyrrolidine (3.0 mL, 36.2 mmol) and heated to 140 deg C. in a microwavereactor. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and theresulting material purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent,providing 292 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.62 (dd, J=6.0 Hz, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 6.44-6.42 (m,1H), 5.89 (s, 0.50H), 5.75 (s, 0.50H), 5.37-5.35 (m, 4H), 4.42-4.33 (m,1H), 4.26-4.23 (m, 0.50H), 4.12 (dd, J=7.8 Hz, 6.8 Hz, 0.50H), 3.93 (t,J=6.3 Hz, 4H), 3.80 (dd, J=7.8 Hz, 6.8 Hz, 0.50H), 3.71-3.67 (m, 0.50H),2.81-2.73 (m, 2H), 2.65-2.57 (m, 4H), 2.05-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.81-1.73 (m,8H), 1.48-1.27 (m, 44H), 0.89 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=766.6 (MH+).

Examples 10 and 11 were prepared using methods similar to those employedfor the preparation of Example 9.

Example 10

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.59-6.65 (m, 2H), 6.44 (t, J=2.3 Hz, 1H),5.75 (s, 1H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 6H), 4.32-4.42 (m, 1H), 4.08-4.18 (m, 1H),3.94 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.78 (dd, J=8.0, 6.5 Hz, 1H), 2.74-2.83 (m, 4H),2.51-2.66 (m, 2H), 2.31-2.37 (m, 6H), 2.00-2.11 (m, 8H), 1.68-1.85 (m,6H), 1.20-1.50 (m, 32H), 0.84-0.93 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=736.5 (MH+).

Example 11

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.63 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.45 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.74 (s, 1H), 5.29-5.48 (m, 8H), 4.38 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 1H), 4.07-4.15(m, 1H), 3.96 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 3.78 (dd, J=8.1, 6.6 Hz, 1H), 2.80 (t,J=6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.62-2.72 (m, 1H), 2.50-2.62 (m, 4H), 2.40-2.50 (m, 2H),2.08 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 4H), 1.70-1.83 (m, 4H), 1.53-1.70 (m, 7H), 1.23-1.53(m, 34H), 0.91 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z 776.7 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 12

To a solution of Intermediate 9b (2.42 g, 3.39 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) wasadded N,N-dimethylglycine (0.38 g, 3.73 mmol), followed by HATU (1.55 g,4.07 mmol) and pyridine (1.1 mL, 13 mmol). The mixture was stirred atroom temperature overnight. The volatiles were removed under reducedpressure and the resulting material purified on silica usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 1.14 g of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.60 (dt, J=8.8 Hz, 2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.44-6.41 (m,1H), 5.87 (s, 0.33H), 5.73 (s, 0.33H), 5.45 (s, 0.33H), 5.36-5.30 (m,4H), 4.74 (m, 0.33H), 3.91 (m, 0.33H), 3.76 (m, 0.33H), 4.50-4.06 (m,4H), 3.91 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.31 (s, 0.66H), 3.22 (s, 0.66H), 3.19 (s,0.66H), 2.38 (s, 2H), 2.36 (s, 2H), 2.34 (s, 2H), 2.04-1.99 (m, 8H),1.78-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.50-1.26 (m, 44H), 0.87 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=798.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 13 Intermediate 13a:

To Intermediate 1a (1.5 g, 2.4 mmol) in THF (10 mL) and MeOH (5 mL) wasadded sodium borohydride (0.116 g, 3.07 mmol). The resulting mixture wasstirred overnight and then quenched with MeOH and water. The resultingmaterial was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layers were dried oversodium sulfate. The material was decanted and the volatiles removedunder reduced pressure. The material was used in the next step withoutfurther purification.

Example 13 Compound

To Intermediate 13a (486 mg, 0.762 mmol) in DCM (5 mL) was added4-dimethylaminobutanoic acid (100 mg, 0.762 mmol), followed by DIEA(0.32 mL, 1.83 mmol), DMAP (50 mg, 0.41 mmol) and EDC (175 mg, 0.92mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperatureand purified directly on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent,providing 319 mg (56%) of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48-6.45 (m, 2H), 6.41-6.38 (m, 1H),5.44-5.29 (m, 8H), 5.04 (s, 2H), 3.92 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.81-2.75 (m,4H), 2.41 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.29 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.21 (s, 6H),2.10-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.87-1.71 (m, 6H), 1.51-1.23 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=6.8Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=750.7 (MH+).

Examples 14-17 were prepared using methods similar to those employed forthe preparation of Example 13.

Example 14

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.49-6.46 (m, 2H), 6.42-6.39 (m, 1H),5.44-5.29 (m, 8H), 5.05 (s, 2H), 3.93 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.82-2.75 (m,4H), 2.68-2.61 (m, 2H), 2.59-2.52 (m, 2H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 2.12-2.01 (m,8H), 1.82-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.52-1.23 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=736.8 (MH+).

Example 15

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51-6.46 (m, 2H), 6.42-6.39 (m, 1H),5.46-5.29 (m, 8H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 3.92 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.23 (s, 2H),2.83-2.75 (m, 4H), 2.37 (s, 6H), 2.12-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.83-1.70 (m, 4H),1.50-1.23 (m, 32H), 0.89 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=722.4 (MH+).

Example 16

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (s, 2H), 5.31-5.45 (m, 8H), 5.07 (s, 2H),3.97 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 2.80 (dd, J=6.3, 6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.68 (t, J=7.1 Hz,2H), 2.54 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.27 (s, 6H), 2.04-2.13 (m, 11H), 1.76-1.85(m, 4H), 1.46-1.53 (m, 4H), 1.26-1.45 (m, 32H), 0.92 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 5H),0.93 (br. s., 1H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=750.5 (MH+).

Example 17

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.40 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.34-6.29 (m, 1H),5.36-5.21 (m, 8H), 4.98 (s, 2H), 3.85 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 2.70 (t, J=6.3Hz, 4H), 2.66-2.54 (m, 2H), 2.14 (s, 6H), 1.98 (q, J=6.6 Hz, 8H),1.72-1.64 (m, 4H), 1.42-1.34 (m, 4H), 1.33-1.16 (m, 36H), 1.10 (d, J=6.6Hz, 3H), 0.85-0.79 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=750.3 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 18 Intermediate 18a:

Linoleic acid (5.0 g, 17.83 mmol) was dissolved in 39.9 mL ethyleneglycol with stirring. To the mixture was added EDC (5.136 g, 26.7 mmol)and HOBt (4.10 g, 26.7 mmol) followed by triethylamine (7.45 mL, 53.5mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 48 hours andchecked for completion by TLC. The crude was diluted in 100 mLdichloromethane and washed with 50 mL water and 50 mL brine. The organiclayer was separated and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The crudeproduct was dry loaded onto celite and purified by silica gelchromatography 10 to 40% gradient EtOAc in heptanes. The product wasrecovered as a clear oil (3.884 g, 67.1%).

Rf=0.22 (silica, 20% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate).

Intermediate 18b:

Intermediate 18a (1.5 g, 4.62 mmol), 3,5-dihydroxybenzaldehyde (0.319 g,2.311 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.273 g, 4.85 mmol) were dissolvedin 19 mL anhydrous THF. DIAD (0.944 mL, 4.85 mmol) was added and thereaction was allowed to stir 48 hours at room temperature. The reactionwas checked for completion by crude NMR using chloroform-d as solvent.The reaction mixture was directly concentrated onto celite and purifiedby silica gel chromatography 10 to 20% EtOAc in heptanes gradient Theproduct was isolated as a colorless oil (1.077 g, 62.1%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.92 (s, 1H), 7.06 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.76 (t,J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 5.31-5.43 (m, 8H), 4.43-4.49 (m, 4H), 4.20-4.26 (m, 4H),2.78 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.37 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.01-2.11 (m, 8H),1.58-1.71 (m, 5H), 1.24-1.42 (m, 30H), 0.90 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

Intermediate 18c:

Intermediate 18b (465.2 mg, 0.619 mmol) was dissolved in 4.1 mL dryethanol under nitrogen. Sodium borohydride (46.9 mg, 1.239 mmol) wasadded in one portion and stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. Thereaction was monitored form completion by TLC. The reaction was quenchedwith acetic acid and diluted with 10 mL water and extracted into 30 mLDCM.

The resulting organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate,filtered and concentrated. The product was recovered as 429 mf of aclear oil.

Rf=0.55 (silica, 30% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate).

Example 18 Compound

Intermediate 18c (50 mg, 0.066 mmol) and N,N-dimethylaminopropanoic acid(10.20 mg, 0.066 mmol) were dissolved in 4 mL DCM. HATU (37.9 mg, 0.100mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (9.25 uL, 0.066 mmol). Thereaction was stirred 18 hours at room temperature and monitored by LCMS.The reaction was diluted with 100 mL DCM and 50 mL water. The organiclayers were separated, then washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfatefiltered and concentrated. The crude was purified by HPLC 5 to 100% 1:1Acetonitrile: Isopropanol in water, modified with 0.1% TFA. The productwas isolated as a 5.4 mg colorless oil.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.84 (s, 1H), 6.74 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 2H),5.21-5.35 (m, 8H), 5.07 (s, 2H), 4.31 (t, J=4.8 Hz, 4H), 4.03-4.08 (m,4H), 2.69 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 4H), 2.47-2.58 (m, 8H), 2.35-2.41 (m, 7H),2.23-2.28 (m, 5H), 1.95-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.79-1.86 (m, 2H), 1.52-1.59 (m,5H), 1.17-1.32 (m, 37H), 0.82 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=867.5 (MH+).

Examples 19-23 and Example 29 were prepared using methods similar tothose employed for the preparation of Example 18.

Example 19

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.50 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.41 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.33-5.44 (m, 8H), 5.07 (s, 2H), 4.27 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 4.03 (t,J=6.1 Hz, 4H), 2.73-2.78 (m, 4H), 2.64 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.29-2.37 (m,10H), 2.12 (dd, J=6.3, 6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.02-2.10 (m, 8H), 1.63 (dd, J=7.3,7.3 Hz, 5H), 1.25-1.41 (m, 32H), 0.91 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=880.4 (MH+).

Example 20

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (t, J=2.0 Hz,1H), 5.27-5.47 (m, 8H), 5.11 (s, 2H), 4.27 (dd, J=6.4, 6.4 Hz, 4H), 4.03(dd, J=6.1, 6.1 Hz, 4H), 3.30 (s, 2H), 2.79 (dd, J=6.4, 6.4 Hz, 4H),2.44 (s, 6H), 2.32 (dd, J=7.5, 7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.03-2.15 (m, 12H),1.53-1.77 (m, 14H), 1.25-1.43 (m, 32H), 0.91 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=867.4 (MH+).

Example 21

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.40 (t, J=2.1 Hz,1H), 5.43-5.32 (m, 8H), 5.11 (s, 2H), 4.17-4.10 (m, 4H), 3.96 (dd,J=5.6, 5.6 Hz, 4H), 3.54 (s, 2H), 3.20-3.27 (m, J=7.3 Hz, 3H), 2.81 (s,22H), 2.77 (dd, J=6.7, 6.7 Hz, 4H), 2.63 (s, 6H), 2.30 (dd, J=7.7, 7.7Hz, 4H), 2.01-2.08 (m, 8H), 1.86-1.78 (m, 8H), 1.66-1.58 (m, 5H),1.42-1.37 (m, 7H), 1.37-1.23 (m, 36H), 0.91-0.87 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=894.5 (MH+).

Example 22

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.48 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.40 (br. s, 1H),5.32-5.43 (m, 8H), 5.11 (s, 2H), 4.10-4.17 (m, 4H), 3.96 (t, J=5.6 Hz,4H), 3.54 (s, 2H), 3.23 (q, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.77 (dd, J=6.7, 6.7 Hz, 4H),2.63 (s, 6H), 2.30 (dd, J=7.7, 7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.02-2.07 (m, 8H), 1.79-1.88(m, 8H), 1.58-1.68 (m, 5H), 1.23-1.39 (m, 38H), 0.89 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 7H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=908.7 (MH+).

Example 23

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.54 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.45 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.33-5.43 (m, 8H), 5.07 (s, 2H), 4.41-4.45 (m, 4H), 4.13-4.18 (m,4H), 2.79 (dd, J=6.5, 6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.63-2.68 (m, 2H), 2.53-2.59 (m, 2H),2.37 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.27 (s, 6H), 2.03-2.09 (m, 8H), 1.61-1.68 (m,8H), 1.27-1.40 (m, 34H), 0.91 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=853.7 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 24 Intermediate 24a:

A solution of citrazinic acid (1.8 g, 11.6 mmol) in DMF (60 mL) wasstirred at room temperature and linoleyl mesylate (16.0 g, 46.4 mmol)and potassium carbonate (8.02 g, 58.0 mmol) were added. The mixture washeated to 80 deg C. overnight and then cooled to room temperature andwater (50 mL) and EtOAc (100 mL) were added. The organic phase wascollected and dried over sodium sulfate and then the volatiles removedunder reduced pressure. The resulting crude material was purified onsilica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 5.2 g of the desiredproduct.

¹³C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 165.3, 163.5, 142.9, 130.2, 130.1, 130.1,120.8, 127.9, 101.2, 66.6, 65.7, 31.6, 29.7, 29.7, 29.5, 29.4, 29.4,29.3, 29.3, 29.1, 28.6, 27.2, 26.1, 26.0, 25.6, 22.6, 14.1 ppm.

Intermediate 24b:

Intermediate 24a (3.06 g, 3.40 mmol) was stirred in EtOH (15 mL) andpotassium hydroxide (329 mg, 5.10 mmol) was added. The cloudy solutionbecame clear and water (10 mL) and THF (8 mL) were added. The resultingmixture was stirred overnight at room temperature and then the volatilesremoved under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was purified onsilica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 1.6 g of the desiredproduct.

ES-MS m/z=652.4 (MH+).

Example 24 Compound

Intermediate 24b (311 mg, 0.477 mmol) was stirred in DMF (15 mL) andHBTU (651 mg, 1.717 mmol), HOBt (120 mg, 0.444 mmol) and DIEA (0.582 mL,3.34 mmol) were added. The reaction was stirred at room temperatureovernight and the reaction poured into water (50 mL) and the resultingmixture extracted with EtOAc. The organic phases were collected anddried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under reduced pressure.The resulting crude material was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAcas eluent, providing 207 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.85 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.42 (t, J=8Hz, 2H), 4.27 (t, J=8 Hz, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=8 Hz, 2H), 2.71 (t, J=8 Hz,2H), 2.34 (s, 6H), 2.07 (dd, J=8 Hz, 8H), 1.78 (q, J=8 Hz, 4H),1.27-1.48 (m, 32H), 0.91 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=724.4 (MH+).

Example 25 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 24.

Example 25

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.84 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.37 (t, J=8Hz, 2H), 4.28 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.79 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.45 (t, J=8 Hz,2H), 2.29 (s, 6H), 2.07 (dd, J=8 Hz, 8H), 1.97 (q, J=5 Hz, 2H), 1.78 (q,J=8 Hz, 6H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=737.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 26 Intermediate 26a:

A solution of 3,5-dihydroxybenzaldehyde (500 mg, 3.62 mmol) in DCE (9mL) was placed in a microwave vial and linoleic acid (2.03 g, 7.24mmol), DIEA (1.26 mL, 7.24 mmol), DMAP (442 mg, 3.62 mmol), and EDC(1.74 g, 9.05 mmol) were added. The reaction was heated to 80 deg C. ina microwave reactor for 20 min and then stored at 4 deg C. for 2 days.The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resultingmaterial was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent,providing 1.44 g of the desired product.

¹³C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 190.2, 171.6, 151.7, 138, 130.3, 130.0,128.1, 127.9, 121.5, 119.9, 34.3, 31.5, 29.6, 29.4, 29.2, 29.1, 29.1,27.2, 27.2, 25.6, 24.8, 22.6, 14.1 ppm.

Intermediate 26b:

Intermediate 26a (1.44 g, 2.17 mmol) was stirred in THF (18 mL) and EtOH(18 mL) and the resulting solution was cooled in an ice bath. Sodiumborohydride (25 mg, 0.65 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred at0 deg C. for 1 h. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc and washed twicewith water. The resulting organic layer was dried over sodium sulfateand then the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. The crudematerial was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc followed byDCM/MeOH as eluent, providing 850 mg (59%) of the desired product.

¹³C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.01-6.97 (m, 2H), 6.82-6.80 (m, 1H),5.45-5.30 (m, 8H), 4.71 (s, 2H), 2.82-2.75 (m, 4H), 2.58-2.51 (m, 4H),2.12-2.01 (m, 8H), 1.80-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.45-1.23 (m, 28H), 0.93-0.86 (m,6H) ppm.

Example 26 Compound

Intermediate 26b (330 mg, 0.496 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) was added3-dimethylaminopropionic acid hydrochloride (114 mg, 0.744 mmol) EDC(143 mg, 0.744 mmol), DMAP (6 mg, 0.05 mmol) and TEA (0.277 mL, 1.98mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperaturethen purified directly on silica using heptanes/EtOAc followed byDCM/MeOH as eluent, providing 428 mg of the desired product as thehydrochloride salt.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.84 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.37 (t, J=8Hz, 2H), 4.28 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.79 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.45 (t, J=8 Hz,2H), 2.29 (s, 6H), 2.07 (dd, J=8 Hz, 8H), 1.97 (q, J=5 Hz, 2H), 1.78 (q,J=8 Hz, 6H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=737.5 (MH+).

Example 27 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 26.

Example 27

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.97 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (t, J=2.1 Hz,1H), 5.27-5.48 (m, 8H), 5.10 (s, 2H), 2.78 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.54 (t,J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.41 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.27-2.35 (m, 2H), 2.22 (s, 6H),2.00-2.12 (m, 8H), 1.82 (quin, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 1.74 (quin, J=7.5 Hz, 4H),1.23-1.46 (m, 28H), 0.89 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=778.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 28 Intermediate 28a:

Intermediate 24b (3.5 g, 3.89 mmol) was stirred in THF (50 mL) and thesolution cooled in an ice bath. To this cold solution was added lithiumaluminum hydride (570 mg, 15 mmol) slowly. Following addition thereaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight.Ice was carefully added and the resulting mixture extracted with EtOAc.The organic layers were collected and dried over sodium sulfate and thenconcentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting crude material waspurified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 1.3 g ofthe desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.27 (s, 2H), 5.44-5.27 (m, 8H), 4.63 (s, 2H),4.23 (t, J=5.7 Hz, 4H), 2.82-2.75 (m, 4H), 2.10-2.02 (m, 8H), 1.80-1.72(m, 4H), 1.47-1.23 (m, 32H), 0.93-0.86 (m, 6H) ppm.

Example 28 Compound

Intermediate 28a (334 mg, 0.523 mmol) was stirred in DCM (20 mL) with3-diethylaminopropionic acid hydrochloride (143 mg, 0.785 mmol). HATU(397 mg, 1.05 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred overnight atroom temperature. Volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and thecrude material was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent,providing 171 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.25 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 5.04 (s, 2H),4.24 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.78-2.87 (m, 6H), 2.55 (dd, J=8 Hz, 6H), 2.07(dd, J=8 Hz, 8H), 1.78 (q, J=8 Hz, 4H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 32H), 1.05 (t, J=8Hz, 6H), 0.91 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=765.7 (MH+).

Example 29 was prepared according to Example 18.

Example 29

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.30 (s, 3H), 5.28-5.45 (m, 8H), 5.14 (s, 2H),5.11 (s, 4H), 2.77 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.61-2.70 (m, 2H), 2.51-2.59 (m,2H), 2.37 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 2.05 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 8H),1.59-1.73 (m, 6H), 1.22-1.43 (m, 26H), 0.89 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=792.4 (MH+).

Examples 30-31 were prepared using methods similar to those employed forthe preparation of Example 28.

Example 30

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.24 (s, 2H), 5.46-5.33 (m, 8H), 5.05 (s, 2H),4.24 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 4H), 2.81-2.72 (m, 7H), 2.66-2.61 (m, 2H), 2.34 (s,6H), 2.02-2.11 (m, 8H), 1.80-1.72 (m, 4H), 1.49-1.40 (m, J=6.0, 13.8 Hz,5H), 1.40-1.25 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=751.7 (MH+).

Example 31

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (t, J=2.0 Hz,1H), 5.44-5.30 (m, 8H), 5.11 (s, 2H), 4.27 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 4.03 (t,J=6.1 Hz, 4H), 3.30 (s, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.44 (s, 6H), 2.32(t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.17-2.10 (m, 4H), 2.09-2.03 (m, 9H), 1.68-1.57 (m,10H), 1.42-1.26 (m, 34H), 0.91 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H).

ES-MS m/z=737.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 32 Intermediate 32a:

Intermediate 28a (330 mg, 0.517 mmol) was stirred in DCM (30 mL) withTEA (0.290 mL, 2.07 mmol) and the resulting solution cooled in an icebath. MsCl (0.08 mL, 1.0 mmol) was added and the resulting mixture wasallowed to warm to room temperature with stirring for 4 h. The reactionwas treated with HCl (30 mL, 1 M in water) and DCM (50 mL) and theorganic layer was collected. The material was dried over sodium sulfateand the volatiles removed under reduced pressure to provide 360 mg ofmaterial that was used without further purification.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.27-6.36 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 10H), 5.14(s, 1H), 4.39-4.50 (m, 1H), 4.17-4.30 (m, 5H), 3.41 (q, J=7.03 Hz, 1H),3.01-3.06 (m, 2H), 2.74-2.84 (m, 5H), 2.07 (q, J=6.86 Hz, 10H),1.70-1.87 (m, 5H), 1.66 (s, 2H), 1.24-1.55 (m, 34H), 0.91 (t, J=6.78 Hz,6H) ppm.

Example 32 Compound

Intermediate 32a (360 mg, 0.503 mmol) was stirred in DMF (3 mL) withdimethylamine (3 mL, 2 M, 11.9 mmol) and the mixture was heated in amicrowave reactor to 140 deg C. for 30 min. This heating was repeateduntil all of the starting material had reacted as determined by TLC. Thevolatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting crudematerial was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent,providing 123 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.27 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.26 (t, J=8Hz, 4H), 3.33 (s, 2H) 2.80 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.26 (s, 6H), 2.07 (dd, J=8Hz, 8H), 1.78 (q, J=5 Hz, 4H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 32H), 0.92 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=665.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 33 Intermediate 33a:

Linoleic acid (3.42 g, 12.19 mmol) was stirred with EDC (2.33 g, 12.2mmol) in DCM (30 mL). Once dissolved, DIEA (2.60 mL, 14.9 mmol) and DMAP(145 mg, 1.19 mmol) were added. After 10 minutes stirring,benzene-1,3,5-triyltrimethanol (1.0 g, 6.0 mmol) was added and theresulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The volatileswere removed under reduced pressure and the resulting crude material waspurified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 1.36 g ofthe desired product.

Rf=0.12 (silica, 20% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate).

Intermediate 33b:

Intermediate 33a (214 mg, 0.309 mmol) was stirred in DCM (30 mL) and PDC(244 mg, 0.648 mmol) was added. The reaction was stirred at roomtemperature overnight. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressureand the resulting crude material was purified on silica usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 210 mg of the desired product.

Rf=0.44 (silica, 20% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate).

Example 33 Compound

Intermediate 33b (210 mg, 0.30 mmol) was stirred in DCE (10 mL) anddimethylamine (0.53 mL, 2.0 M in THF, 1.06 mmol) was added. Acetic acid(0.017 mL, 0.304 mmol) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (129 mg, 0.608mmol) were added and the material was stirred at room temperatureovernight. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and theresulting crude material was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAcfollowed by DCM/MeOH as eluent, providing 186 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.29-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.22 (m, 1H),5.44-5.27 (m, 8H), 5.10 (s, 4H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 2.81-2.74 (m, 4H), 2.36(t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 2.10-2.01 (m, 8H), 1.70-1.58 (m, 4H),1.42-1.21 (m, 28H), 0.89 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=721.1 (MH+).

Examples 34-36 were prepared using methods similar to those employed forthe preparation of Example 33.

Example 34

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.21 (s, 2H); 7.18 (s, 1H), 5.03 (s, 4H); 3.42(br s, 2H); 2.28 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H); 2.22 (s, 6H); 1.61-1.53 (m, 4H);1.27-1.15 (m, 36H); 0.81 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=588.5 (MH+).

Example 35

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.26 (s, 2H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 5.10 (s, 4H), 3.43(s, 2H), 2.29 (d, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 1.87 (m, 2H), 1.31-1.25(m, 58H), 0.91-0.87 (m, 12H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=756.6 (MH+).

Example 36

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.28-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.22 (m, 1H),5.44-5.29 (m, 4H), 5.10 (s, 4H), 3.43 (s, 2H), 2.83-2.73 (m, 2H), 2.36(t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.29 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 2.10-2.00 (m,4H), 1.92-1.80 (m, 1H), 1.71-1.57 (m, 2H), 1.43-1.17 (m, 42H), 0.94-0.83(m, 9H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=736.6 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 37 Intermediate 37a:

To a solution of 3-formyl-5-(methoxycarbonyl)benzoic acid (1 g, 4.80mmol) in THF (25 mL) was added LiOH (12.01 ml, 24.02 mmol) and stirredat room temp for 16 h. Partial hydrolysis was observed. Reaction washeated to 50° C. for additional 16 h. The reaction was diluted withEtOAc (50 mL) and water (50 mL) and the pH adjusted to neutral with 1 NHCl. The organic layer was collected, washed with water (2×50 mL) anddried over sodium sulfate. The volatiles were removed under reducedpressure and the resulting material was used without furtherpurification.

Intermediate 37b:

Intermediate 37a (700 mg, 0.36 mmol) was stirred in DCM (15 mL) andoxalylchloride (3.16 mL, 36 mmol) was added along with a drop of DMF.The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. Thevolatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting residuewas redissolved in THF (10 mL). Linoleyl alcohol (2.02 g, 7.57 mmol) wasadded followed by TEA (2.51 mL, 18.0 mmol) and the resulting mixture wasstirred in an ice bath for 3 h. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (50mL) and water (50 mL). The organic layer was collected, washed withwater (2×50 mL) and dried over sodium sulfate. The volatiles wereremoved under reduced pressure and the resulting crude material waspurified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 350 mg ofthe desired product.

ES-MS m/z=692.4 (MH+).

Intermediate 37c:

To a solution of Intermediate 37b (250 mg, 0.36 mmol) in THF (30 mL) andEtOH (15 mL) was added sodium borohydride (17.8 mg, 0.47 mmol). Thereaction was stirred for 30 min at room temperature and then dilutedwith EtOAc (50 mL) and water (50 mL). The organic layer was collected,washed with water (2×50 mL) and dried over sodium sulfate. The volatileswere removed under reduced pressure and the resulting crude material waspurified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 260 mg ofthe desired product.

ES-MS m/z=694.3 (MH+).

Example 37 Compound

To a solution of 3-dimethylaminopropionic acid (25 mg, 0.16 mmol) in DCM(3 mL) was added EDC (31 mg, 0.16 mmol) and DMAP (1.32 mg, 0.011 mmol)followed by TEA (0.06 mL, 0.43 mmol). The resulting solution was stirredfor 30 min at room temperature and Intermediate 37c (75 mg, 0.11 mmol)was added. The reaction was stirred for 16 h and then diluted with DCM(20 mL) and water (20 mL). The organic layer was collected and washedwith water (2×20 mL) and then dried over magnesium sulfate. Thevolatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting crudematerial was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent,providing 41 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.63 (t, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 8.20 (d, J=1.8 Hz,2H), 5.47-5.26 (m, 8H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 4.35 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 2.89-2.74(m, 6H), 2.74-2.65 (m, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.39 (s, 6H), 2.12-1.95 (m, 8H),1.87-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.49-1.19 (m, 33H), 0.89 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=792.4 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 38 Intermediate 38a:

A solution of 4-(vinyloxy)butan-1-ol (50 g, 430 mmol) in DCM (430 mL)was cooled in an ice bath. To this solution was added TEA (90 mL, 646mmol) followed by dropwise addition of methanesulfonyl chloride (36.9ml, 473 mmol). During the second half of addition a white precipitateformed, and as addition was completed the reaction turned pale orange.The reaction was stirred overnight, allowing the ice to melt and thereaction to come to ambient temperature. The reaction was poured into aseparatory funnel and diluted with 400 mL saturated sodium bicarbonate(aq) and 400 mL EtOAc. The layers were separated and the aqueous layerwas extracted with 300 mL EtOAc two more times. The EtOAc layers werewashed with 200 mL saturated sodium bicarbonate followed by water, andthe EtOAc layer was then dried over sodium sulfate, and filtered. Thefiltrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 84 g, (100%)of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.47 (dd, J=6.8, 14.3 Hz, 1H), 4.29 (t, J=6.3Hz, 2H), 4.19 (dd, J=2.0, 14.3 Hz, 1H), 4.02 (dd, J=2.0, 6.8 Hz, 1H),3.74 (t, J=5.9 Hz, 2H), 3.03 (s, 3H), 1.96-1.85 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.73 (m,2H) ppm.

Intermediate 38b:

Intermediate 38a (84 g, 435 mmol) was stirred in DMF (400 mL) and3,5-dihydroxybenzaldehyde (27.3 g, 198 mmol) was added followed bypotassium carbonate (109 mg, 791 mmol). The reaction was heated to 80deg C. overnight. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction wasdiluted with EtOAc (600 mL) and water (700 mL). The organic layer wascollected and the aqueous layer was extracted again with EtOAc (300 mL).The organic layers were combined and washed with water (4×300 mL), driedover sodium sulfate, and then the volatiles were removed under reducedpressure. The resulting crude material was purified on silica usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 56 g of the desired product.

ES-MS m/z=335.1 (MH+).

Intermediate 38c:

Intermediate 38b (37 g, 111 mmol) was stirred with dimethylamine (116mL, 2 M in THF, 332 mmol) and acetic acid (6.33 mL, 111 mmol) in DCM(400 mL). To this mixture was added sodium triacetoxyborohydride (58.6g, 277 mmol) and the reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight.To the reaction was added saturated sodium bicarbonate (800 mL) andEtOAc (1000 mL). The organic phase was collected and the aqueous phasewas extracted with EtOAc (500 mL). The combined organic phases weredried over sodium sulfate and the volatiles removed under reducedpressure. The resulting crude material was purified on silica usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent, providing 34 g of the desired product.

ES-MS m/z=364.9 (MH+).

Intermediate 38d:

To a solution of Intermediate 38c (42 g, 116 mmol) in EtOAc (200 mL) wasadded HCl (87 mL, 4 M in dioxane, 348 mmol). Once the reaction wascomplete, as monitored by TLC, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (500mL) was added and the pH was adjusted to 10 by the addition of solidpotassium carbonate. EtOAc (600 mL) was added and the organic layer wascollected. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3×500 mL) and thecombined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate. The volatileswere removed under reduced pressure to provide 35 g of material that wasused without further purification.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.50 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.37 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 4.01 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 4H), 3.79-3.68 (m, 6H), 3.36 (s, 2H), 2.26 (s,6H), 1.93-1.82 (m, 4H), 1.82-1.67 (m, 4H) ppm.

Example 38 Compound

To a solution of Intermediate 36 (10 g, 32 mmol) in DCM (161 mL) wasadded DMAP (392 mg, 3.21 mmol), DIEA (16.8 mL, 96 mmol) and linoleicacid (18.9 g, 67.4 mmol). EDC (14.8 g, 77 mmol) was added and thematerial was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. Saturatedaqueous sodium bicarbonate (500 mL) was added and the resulting mixturewas extracted with EtOAc (3×600 mL). The combined organic layers weredried over sodium sulfate and then the volatiles removed under reducedpressure. The resulting crude material was purified on silica usingheptanes/EtOAc as an eluent to provide 18.6 g of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.50 (br s, 2H), 6.36 (br s, 1H), 5.28-5.45(m, 8H), 4.14 (t, J=6.05 Hz, 4H), 3.98 (t, J=5.70 Hz, 4H), 3.39 (br s,2H), 2.78 (t, J=6.55 Hz, 4H), 2.16-2.41 (m, 10H), 1.98-2.12 (m, 8H),1.77-1.90 (m, 8H), 1.52-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.20-1.43 (m, 28H), 0.90 (t,J=6.85 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=836.7 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 39 Intermediate 39a:

This material was prepared in a manner similar to the preparation ofIntermediate 18b using linoleic acid and 1,3-propanediol as startingmaterials.

Rf=0.74 (silica, 40% EtOAc in Heptane, UV and cerium molybdate).

Example 39 Compound

To a solution of Intermediate 39a (2.42 g, 3.11 mmol) in DCE (20 mL) wasadded dimethylamine (3.25 mL, 2.0 M in THF, 6.5 mmol) and acetic acid(0.18 mL, 3.1 mmol) followed by sodium triacetoxyborohydride (1.32 g,6.21 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight andthen saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate was added followed by DCM. Theorganic layer was collected and then washed with additional saturatedaqueous sodium bicarbonate. The resulting aqueous layer was backextracted with DCM and the organic layers combined and dried over sodiumsulfate. The volatiles removed under reduced pressure. The resultingcrude material was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc followed byDCM/MeOH as an eluent to provide 1.4 g of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.89 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.21-1.43 (m, 28H)1.55-1.71 (m, 4H) 1.98-2.14 (m, 12H) 2.25 (s, 6H) 2.30 (t, J=7.65 Hz,4H) 2.77 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 4H) 3.35 (s, 2H) 4.02 (t, J=6.15 Hz, 4H) 4.25(t, J=6.40 Hz, 4H) 5.24-5.52 (m, 8H) 6.35 (t, J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.48 (d,J=2.26 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=809.2 (MH+).

Examples 40-64 were prepared using similar methods to those employed forthe preparation of Example 39.

Example 40

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.88 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.22-1.42 (m, 28H)1.56-1.71 (m, 4H) 1.98-2.10 (m, 8H) 2.23 (s, 6H) 2.34 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 4H)2.76 (t, J=6.53 Hz, 4H) 3.34 (s, 2H) 4.08-4.20 (m, 4H) 4.35-4.46 (m, 4H)5.26-5.44 (m, 8H) 6.38 (t, J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.51 (d, J=2.26 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=781.3 (MH+).

Example 41

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.90 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.29-1.52 (m, 24H)1.63 (quin, J=7.45 Hz, 8H) 1.71-1.82 (m, 4H) 2.26 (s, 6H) 2.30 (t,J=7.58 Hz, 4H) 3.37 (s, 2H) 3.93 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 4H) 4.06 (t, J=6.69 Hz,4H) 6.35 (t, J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 6.47 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 3H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=620.2 (MH+).

Example 42

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.88 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.19-1.50 (m, 32H)1.55-1.68 (m, 8H) 1.71-1.85 (m, 4H) 2.21-2.39 (m, 10H) 3.40 (br. s., 2H)3.94 (t, J=6.44 Hz, 4H) 4.07 (t, J=6.69 Hz, 4H) 6.36 (t, J=2.27 Hz, 1H)6.49 (d, J=2.02 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=676.6 (MH+).

Example 43

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.88 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.21-1.50 (m, 40H)1.62 (quin, J=6.95 Hz, 8H) 1.70-1.82 (m, 4H) 2.25 (s, 6H) 2.29 (t,J=7.58 Hz, 4H) 3.35 (s, 2H) 3.93 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 4H) 4.06 (t, J=6.82 Hz,4H) 6.35 (t, J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 6.46 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=732.1 (MH+).

Example 44

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.89 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.23-1.51 (m, 32H)1.57-1.69 (m, 8H) 1.70-1.82 (m, 4H) 2.24-2.39 (m, 10H) 3.43 (br. s., 2H)3.94 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 4H) 4.06 (t, J=6.69 Hz, 4H) 6.37 (t, J=2.15 Hz, 1H)6.50 (d, J=1.52 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=676.6 (MH+).

Example 45

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.90 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.23-1.52 (m, 36H)1.65 (dt, J=14.59, 7.48 Hz, 8H) 1.73-1.83 (m, 4H) 1.99-2.11 (m, 8H) 2.24(s, 6H) 2.30 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 4H) 2.78 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 4H) 3.39 (br. s.,2H) 3.94 (t, J=6.44 Hz, 4H) 4.08 (t, J=6.69 Hz, 4H) 5.25-5.49 (m, 8H)6.35 (t, J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 6.46 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=893.8 (MH+).

Example 46

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.89 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.23-1.51 (m, 44H)1.55-1.69 (m, 8H) 1.71-1.82 (m, 4H) 1.99-2.11 (m, 8H) 2.24 (s, 6H) 2.30(t, J=7.58 Hz, 4H) 2.78 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 4H) 3.35 (s, 2H) 3.93 (t, J=6.57Hz, 4H) 4.07 (t, J=6.69 Hz, 4H) 5.28-5.45 (m, 8H) 6.35 (t, J=2.27 Hz,1H) 6.46 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=948.8 (MH+).

Example 47

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.49-6.43 (m, 2H), 6.37-6.32 (m, 1H), 4.07 (t,J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 3.93 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 3.35 (s, 2H), 2.29 (t, J=7.6 Hz,4H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 1.84-1.72 (m, 4H), 1.72-1.55 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.36 (m,8H), 1.36-1.16 (m, 24H), 0.88 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=676.4 (MH+).

Example 48

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ: 6.65-6.58 (m, 2H), 6.44-6.39 (m, 1H), 4.07(t, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 3.96 (t J=6.3 Hz, 4H), 3.72 (s, 2H), 2.52 (s, 6H),2.29 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 1.84-1.73 (m, 4H), 1.72-1.56 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.36(m, 8H), 1.36-1.18 (m, 16H), 0.91-0.84 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=620.4 (MH+).

Example 49

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.45 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 2H) 6.35 (t, J=1.00 Hz1H), 5.31-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.11-4.19 (m, 5H), 3.97 (t, J=1.00 Hz, 4H),3.65-3.76 (m, 2H), 3.60 (s, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=1.00 Hz, 4H), 2.32 (t,J=7.53 Hz, 4H), 2.07 (q, J=6.78 Hz, 8H), 1.80-1.89 (m, 8H), 1.64 (d,J=16.81 Hz, 6H), 1.24-43 (m, 31H), 0.91 (t, J=1.00 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=864.6 (MH+).

Example 50

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (t, J=2.2 Hz,1H), 5.43-5.25 (m, 4H), 4.08 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 3.94 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H),3.38 (s, 2H), 2.30 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.27 (s, 6H), 2.07-1.90 (m, 8H),1.85-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.71-1.55 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.29 (m, 24H), 0.90 (t, J=7.4Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=728.5 (MH+).

Example 51

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.17 (t, J=8Hz, 4H), 4.01 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 3.37 (s, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.32(t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 2.10 (s, 3H), 2.08 (dd, J=8 Hz, 8H), 1.87(q, J=5 Hz, 8H), 1.64 (m, 4H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 28H), 0.90 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=851.5 (MH+).

Example 52

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.88 (t, J=8.00 Hz, 6H) 1.18-1.50 (m, 40H)1.56-1.70 (m, 8H) 1.70-1.81 (m, 4H) 2.24 (s, 6H) 2.30 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 4H)3.34 (s, 2H) 3.93 (t, J=6.53 Hz, 4H) 4.06 (t, J=6.78 Hz, 4H) 6.35 (t,J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.46 (d, J=2.26 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=732.5 (MH+).

Example 53

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.83-0.97 (m, 6H) 1.19-1.51 (m, 48H) 1.56-1.68(m, 8H) 1.71-1.83 (m, 4H) 2.24 (s, 6H) 2.30 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 4H) 3.34 (s,2H) 3.93 (t, J=6.53 Hz, 4H) 4.06 (t, J=6.78 Hz, 4H) 6.35 (t, J=2.26 Hz,1H) 6.46 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=788.6 (MH+).

Example 54

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.59 (br s, 2H), 6.44 (br s, 1H), 5.27-5.44(m, 8H), 4.26 (t, J=4.9 Hz, 4H), 4.13 (t, J=4.65 Hz, 4H), 3.85 (t,J=4.65 Hz, 4H), 3.77 (t, J=4.9 Hz, 4H), 3.50 (br s, 2H), 2.77 (t, J=6.65Hz, 4H), 2.21-2.52 (m, 10H), 1.96-2.12 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.70 (m, 4H),1.19-1.45 (m, 28H), 0.89 (t, J=6.90 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=869.8 (MH+).

Example 55

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.52 (s, 2H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.16 (t, J=8Hz, 4H), 4.00 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 3.52 (s, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.54(dd, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.32 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.09 (s, 3H), 2.08 (dd, J=8 Hz,8H), 1.87 (q, J=5 Hz, 8H), 1.64 (m, 4H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 28H), 1.06 (t,J=8 Hz, 6H), 0.91 (t, J=8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=878.6 (MH+).

Example 56

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (d, J=2.02 Hz, 2H) 6.35 (t, J=2.27 Hz,1H) 4.25 (t, J=6.32 Hz, 4H) 4.03 (t, J=6.19 Hz, 4H) 3.35 (s, 2H)2.20-2.30 (m, 10H) 2.10 (quin, J=6.25 Hz, 4H) 1.84 (br. s., 2H)1.19-1.36 (m, 56H) 0.81-0.97 (m, 12H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=845.7 (MH+).

Example 57

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51-6.45 (m, 2H), 6.38-6.33 (m, 1H), 4.06 (t,J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 3.93 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.40 (s, 2H), 2.30 (t, J=7.5 Hz,4H), 2.28 (s, 6H), 1.82-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.70-1.56 (m, 8H), 1.54-1.20 (m,40H), 0.93-0.84 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=732.4 (MH+).

Example 58

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.54 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.37 (t, J=2.25 Hz,1H), 5.25-5.46 (m, 8H), 4.26 (t, J=4.8 Hz, 4H), 4.11 (t, J=4.75 Hz, 4H),3.85 (t, J=4.75 Hz, 4H), 3.77 ((t, J=4.9 Hz, 4H), 3.48 (s, 2H), 2.77 (t,J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.50 (q, J=7.1 Hz, 4H), 2.34 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 1.98-2.13(m, 8H), 1.55-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.22-1.42 (m, 28H), 1.03 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 6H),0.89 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=897.9 (MH+).

Example 59

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (d, J=2.26 Hz, 2H) 6.36 (t, J=2.51 Hz,1H) 4.08 (t, J=6.65 Hz, 4H) 3.94 (t, J=6.40 Hz, 4H) 3.43 (s, 2H)2.23-2.35 (m, 10H) 2.03 (s, 1H) 1.78 (ddt, J=14.05, 13.30, 7.53, 7.53Hz, 4H) 1.57-1.70 (m, 8H) 1.38-1.53 (m, 8H) 1.22-1.34 (m, 33H) 0.88 (t,J=6.02 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=733.6 (MH+).

Example 60

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.49 (br. s., 2H), 6.36 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H),5.44-5.28 (m, 4H), 4.15 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 4H), 3.98 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 4H), 3.36(br. s., 2H), 2.38-2.18 (m, 10H), 2.10-1.95 (m, 8H), 1.92-1.76 (m, 8H),1.71-1.56 (m, J=7.3, 7.3 Hz, 4H), 1.30 (d, J=15.6 Hz, 40H), 0.90 (t,J=6.5 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=840.7 (MH+).

Example 61

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.54 (br s, 2H) 6.37 (br s, 1H) 4.14 (t,J=6.30 Hz, 4H) 3.98 (t, J=5.65 Hz, 4H) 3.48 (br s, 2H) 2.22-2.51 (m,10H) 1.73-1.93 (m, 8H) 1.62 (m, 4H) 1.19-1.49 (m, 40H), 0.88 (t, J=6.9Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=732.7 (MH+).

Example 62

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 2H), 6.36 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.55-5.18 (m, 12H), 4.15 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 4H), 3.98 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 4H),3.41 (br. s., 2H), 2.82 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 8H), 2.39-2.22 (m, 10H), 2.17-2.00(m, 8H), 1.92-1.74 (m, 9H), 1.71-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.45-1.22 (m, 16H), 0.99(t, J=7.5 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=833.0 (MH+).

Example 63

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (s, 2H), 6.37 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H),5.49-5.23 (m, 6H), 4.15 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 3.99 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 4H), 3.42(br. s., 2H), 2.79 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 2.39-2.21 (m, 10H), 2.18-1.95 (m,8H), 1.94-1.73 (m, 8H), 1.73-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.44-1.19 (m, 34H), 0.95-0.86(m, J=4.0, 6.8, 6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=838.7 (MH+).

Example 64

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.48-5.27 (m, 10H), 4.15 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 4H), 3.98 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 4H),3.36 (s, 2H), 2.90-2.73 (m, 6H), 2.32 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.26 (s, 6H),2.16-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.93-1.75 (m, 8H), 1.64 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 4H), 1.44-1.22(m, 22H), 0.99 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H), 0.91 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=835.0 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 65 Intermediate 65a:

To a solution of diethyl 5-(hydroxymethyl)isophthalate (509 mg, 2.02mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added NaOH (5.04 mL, 1.0 M in water, 5.04 mmol).The reaction was stirred for 3 days at room temperature. Volatiles wereremoved under reduced pressure and the resulting material was usedwithout further purification.

Intermediate 65b:

Intermediate 65a (168 mg, 0.694 mmol) was stirred in DCM (25 mL) and EDC(399 mg, 2.08 mmol) and HOBt (319 mg, 2.08 mmol) were added followed byTEA (0.481 mL, 3.47 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperaturefor 5 min and the linoleyl amine hydrochloride (419 mg, 1.39 mmol) wasadded. The reaction was stirred overnight at room temperature and thendiluted with DCM (100 mL) and water (100 mL). The organic layer wascollected and washed with water (2×50 mL) and dried over magnesiumsulfate. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure. Theresulting crude material was purified on silica using heptanes/EtOAc asan eluent to provide 150 mg of the desired material.

ES-MS m/z=691.4 (MH+).

Example 65 Compound

Example 65 was prepared from Intermediate 65b using conditions similarto those used in preparation of Example 37.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.11 (t, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=1.5 Hz,2H), 6.43 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 5.25-5.48 (m, 8H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 3.33-3.53(m, 4H), 2.77 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.60-2.70 (m, 2H), 2.49-2.60 (m, 2H),2.26 (s, 6H), 2.05 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 8H), 1.55-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.18-1.47 (m,32H), 0.89 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=790.4 (MH+).

Example 66 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 65.

Example 66

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.11 (t, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=1.5 Hz,2H), 6.50 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 5.20-5.48 (m, 8H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 3.31-3.55(m, 4H), 2.66-2.85 (m, 4H), 2.41 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.28 (t, J=7.3 Hz,2H), 2.20 (s, 6H), 2.04 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 8H), 1.82 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H),1.54-1.67 (m, 4H), 1.17-1.45 (m, 32H), 0.88 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=804.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 67 Intermediate 67a:

To a solution of methyl-3-(3,5-dihydroxyphenyl)acetate (1.0 g, 5.4 mmol)in DMF (25 mL) was added linoleyl mesylate (4.16 g, 12.1 mmol) andpotassium carbonate (3.0 g, 21.6 mmol). The reaction was heated to 100deg C. for 4 h after which the reaction was cooled to room temperatureand water (100 mL) was added. The resulting mixture was extracted withEtOAc (3×50 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine,dried over sodium sulfate, and the volatiles were removed under reducedpressure. The resulting crude material was purified on silica usingn-hexane/EtOAc as the eluent to yield 3.3 g of the desired product.

ES-MS m/z=680 (MH+).

Intermediate 67b:

Intermediate 67a (3.3 g, 4.8 mmol) was stirred in THF (50 mL) and cooledin an ice bath. A solution of lithium aluminum hydride (370 mg, 97 mmol)in THF (3 mL) was added slowly to the stirring reaction. Following theaddition the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. Thematerial was then cooled again in an ice bath and water (5 mL) and EtOAc(5 mL) were added. After 10 minutes, the resulting slurry was filteredthrough celite and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure toprovide 2.8 g of material that was used without further purification.

Example 67 Compound

Intermediate 67b (75 mg, 0.12 mmol) in DCM (3 mL) was added3-dimethylaminopropionic acid hydrochloride (26 mg, 0.17 mmol) and HATU(88 mg, 0.23 mmol) followed by TEA (0.016 mL, 0.12 mmol). The reactionwas stirred overnight at room temperature and then water (2 mL) wasadded. The mixture was extracted with DCM (3×5 mL) and the combinedorganic layers dried over sodium sulfate. The volatiles were removedunder reduced pressure and the resulting crude material was purified onsilica using DCM/MeOH as an eluent to provide 72 mg of the desiredmaterial.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.32-6.37 (m, 3H), 5.28-5.44 (m, 8H), 4.37 (t,J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.92 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 3.36 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 2.86-2.92(m, 8H), 2.75-2.81 (m, 6H), 2.06 (ddd, J=6.7, 6.7, 6.7 Hz, 8H),1.71-1.80 (m, 4H), 1.41-1.49 (m, 4H), 1.24-1.41 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=7.1Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=750.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 68

Intermediate 13a (82.5 mg, 0.130 mmol) was dissolved in dry CDCl₃ (2 mL)4-nitrophenyl carbonochloridate (28.7 mg, 0.142 mmol) was added followedby pyridine (0.011 mL, 0.129 mmol). This was stirred at 50 deg C. for 30minutes. After this time the heat was turned off and the reaction waslet stir overnight at room temperature. The reaction was checked by TLCwhich indicates complete consumption of SM. The intermediate wasconcentrated and redissolved in dichloromethane (3 mL),3-(dimethylamino)propan-1-ol (66.8 mg, 0.648 mmol) was added followed byDMAP (3.16 mg, 0.026 mmol). The reaction was stirred 72 h at roomtemperature. The reaction was quenched with water (2 mL) and extractedinto additional DCM (3×5 mL). The organic layers were concentrated. Thecrude material was purified on silica using 0 to 6% MeOH in DCM aseluent to yield 47 mg of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.32-5.48 (m, 8H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 4.23 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (t,J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.80 (dd, J=6.4, 6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.37 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H),2.24 (s, 6H), 1.99-2.16 (m, 8H), 1.82-1.91 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.82 (m, 4H),1.41-1.50 (m, 5H), 1.27-1.41 (m, 29H), 0.83-0.97 (m, J=6.8, 6.8 Hz, 5H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=766.5 (MH+).

Example 69 was prepared using methods similar to those described forIntermediate 33a and Example 68.

Example 69

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.33 (s, 2H), 7.31 (s, 1H), 5.25-5.45 (m, 8H),5.16 (s, 2H), 5.11 (s, 4H), 4.22 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.73-2.82 (m, 4H),2.43-2.55 (m, 6H), 2.37 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.01-2.09 (m, 8H), 1.83(quin, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 1.57-1.71 (m, 5H), 1.21-1.42 (m, 28H), 1.01 (t,J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 0.89 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=850.6 (MH+).

Examples 70 and 71 were prepared using methods similar to those employedfor the preparation of Example 69.

Example 70

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.33 (s, 2H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 5.29-5.43 (m, 8H),5.16 (s, 2H), 5.11 (s, 4H), 4.25 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 2.77 (t, J=6.5 Hz,4H), 2.60 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 2.37 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.29 (s, 6H), 2.05(q, J=6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.52-1.75 (m, 4H), 1.24-1.40 (m, 29H), 0.88 (t, J=6.8Hz, 5H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=808.5 (MH+).

Example 71

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.34 (s, 2H), 7.32 (s, 1H), 5.29-5.45 (m, 8H),5.17 (s, 2H), 5.12 (s, 4H), 4.24 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=6.5 Hz,4H), 2.34-2.41 (m, 6H), 2.24 (s, 6H), 2.06 (q, J=6.7 Hz, 8H), 1.87(quin, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 1.61-1.72 (m, 4H), 1.25-1.42 (m, 29H), 0.91 (t,J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=822.6 (MH+).

Example 72 was prepared using methods similar to those used in thesynthesis of Intermediate 26b and Example 68.

Example 72

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.01 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (t, J=2.1 Hz,1H), 5.30-5.46 (m, 8H), 5.14 (s, 2H), 4.26 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 2.79 (t,J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.61 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 2.54 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.29 (s,6H), 2.01-2.11 (m, 8H), 1.74 (dt, J=14.7, 7.5 Hz, 4H), 1.24-1.46 (m,31H), 0.90 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=780.4 (MH+).

Example 73 was prepared using procedures similar to those used in thesynthesis of Intermediate 13a and Example 68.

Example 73

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.52 (s, 2H), 5.50-5.25 (m, 8H), 5.07 (s, 2H),4.21 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.93 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 3.63 (quin, J=7.1 Hz,1H), 2.79 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.36 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.22 (s, 6H), 2.06(q, J=6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.92-1.71 (m, 6H), 1.56-1.41 (m, 4H), 1.41-1.20 (m,34H), 0.90 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 3H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=810.1 (MH+).

Examples 74 and 75 were prepared using methods similar to those employedfor the preparation of Example 73.

Example 74

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.55 (s, 2H), 5.44-5.30 (m, 8H), 5.08 (s, 2H),4.22 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 4.02 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H), 2.78 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 4H),2.35 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.22 (s, 6 H), 2.06 (q, J=6.7 Hz, 8H), 1.90-1.77(m, 6H), 1.55-1.46 (m, 4H), 1.42-1.22 (m, 28H), 0.89 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=846.3 (MH+) (bromine isotope pattern observed).

Example 75

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.59 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 6.48 (d, J=2.8 Hz,1H), 5.51-5.29 (m, 8H), 5.26 (s, 2H), 4.25 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (t,J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.80 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.38 (t,J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.24 (s, 6H), 2.07 (q, J=6.7 Hz, 8H), 1.91-1.75 (m, 6H),1.55-1.44 (m, 4H), 1.44-1.24 (m, 30H), 0.91 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=802.8 (MH+) (chloro isotope pattern observed).

Synthesis of Example 76 Intermediate 76a:

Intermediate 13a (120 mg, 0.188 mmol), isoindoline-1,3-dione (34.6 mg,0.235 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (64.2 mg, 0.245 mmol) were dissolvedTHF (1.5 mL). DIAD (0.044 mL, 0.226 mmol) was then added dropwise. Thereaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Reaction waschecked for completion by LCMS. The reaction was concentrated thenwashed with water then brine and dried over sodium sulfate andreconcentrated. Desired product was obtained as a mixture withtriphenylphosphine oxide to yield 144.0 mg of material.

Intermediate 76b:

Intermediate 76a (144 mg, 0.188 mmol, mixture) was dissolved in EtOH(3.7 mL). Hydrazine (0.030 mL, 0.940 mmol) was added and the reactionwas heated for 4 hours at 50 deg C. The reaction was monitored forcompletion by LCMS. The reaction was concentrated and suspended in DCM(10 mL). Reaction was filtered. Filtrate was then loaded on to DCMpre-equilibrated SCX 2 g column. The column was washed with 3CV of DCMand product was eluted with DCM+5% 7N ammonia in methanol to recover 57mg of the desired product.

ES-MS m/z=636.5 (MH+).

Example 76 Compound

Intermediate 76b (36.1 mg, 0.057 mmol), 2-(dimethylamino)acetic acidhydrochloride (23.77 mg, 0.170 mmol) and HATU (43.2 mg, 0.114 mmol) weredissolved in DCM (4 mL). Triethylamine (0.032 mL, 0.227 mmol) was thenadded and the reaction was stirred 18 hours at room temperature andchecked by LCMS. The reaction was quenched with water (2 mL) andextracted into additional DCM (3×5 mL). The reaction was purified bysilica gel chromatography in 0 to 5% MeOH in DCM to provide 20 mg of thedesired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.34 (br. s., 1H), 6.43 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H),6.40-6.33 (m, 1H), 5.54-5.30 (m, 8H), 4.40 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (t,J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 3.01 (s, 2H), 2.80 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.30 (s, 6H),2.13-1.98 (m, 8H), 1.70-1.82 (m, J=6.6 Hz, 4H), 1.53-1.23 (m, 41H), 0.91(t, J=7.1 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=721.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 77 Intermediate 77a:

In a round bottom flask, diethyl 5-(hydroxymethyl)isophthalate (15.53 g,47.6 mmol) and DIPEA (10.39 mL, 59.5 mmol) were taken into chloroform(40 mL). The resulting suspension was stirred for 1 h. To the resultingsuspension was added toluenesulfonic anhydride (10 g, 39.6 mmol), andthe reaction stirred at ambient temperature. After 20 h, the reactionsolution was added dropwise to dimethylamine (60 ml, 120 mmol) over 30minutes to control exothermic reaction below reflux. The reaction wasstirred at ambient temperature for 3 h. The reaction was diluted withdichloromethane (200 mL), saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (200 mL),and water (50 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous wasextracted with dichoromethane (3×100 mL). The combined organics werewashed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (3×100 mL). Theorganics were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash chromatography(silica gel, 0%-10% methanol in dichloromethane) followed by flashchromatography (silica-gel, 0%-100% ethyl acetate in dichloromethane,0%-10% methanol in ethylacetate) to provide 7.3 g of the desiredproduct.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 1.44 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 6H); 2.29 (s, 6H); 3.55 (s,2H); 4.43 (q, J=7.1 Hz, 4H); 8.20 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 2H); 8.61 (t, J=1.5 Hz,1H) ppm.

Intermediate 77b:

In a round bottom flask, LAH (2.480 g, 65.3 mmol) was taken intotetrahydrofuran (50 mL) and the reaction placed in an ambient waterbath. Intermediate 77a (7.3 g, 26.1 mmol) dissolved in THF (10 mL) andadded dropwise over 10 minutes to the LAH suspension to maintainexothermic reaction below reflux. The resulting green suspension wasstirred overnight at ambient temperature, at which time it had changedto dark grey. The reaction was diluted to 150 mL with additional THF andquenched with water (2.5 mL) by dropwise addition to maintaintemperature below reflux. After stirring at ambient temperature for 15minutes, The reaction was further quenched with 2.5 M aqueous NaOH (5mL) by dropwise addition over 5 minutes. The reaction was stirred atambient temperature for 5 minutes and water (7.5 mL) were added dropwiseover 1 min, at which point the suspension became white. The reaction wasstirred at ambient temperature for 2 h, after which the salts werefiltered through celite with ethyl acetate washing. The filtrate wascollected and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide viscouscolorless oil. The material was dissolved into dichloromethane andpurified by flash column chromatography (silica gel 0%-50% methanol indichloromethane). Product fractions were collected and solvents wereremoved under reduced pressure to provide colorless oil. The materialwas dissolved into dichloromethane (100 mL) and filtered. Washing theresidue with ethyl acetate resulted in additional precipitate. Solventswere removed under reduced pressure and the material was redissolved inethyl acetate (100 mL), filtered, and solvents were removed underreduced pressure to provide 4 g of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 2.21 (s, 6H); 3.37 (s, 2H); 3.77 (br s, 2H);4.56 (s, 4H); 7.16 (s, 2H); 7.21 (s, 1H) ppm.

Intermediate 77c:

In a borosilicate glass vial, linoleyl alcohol (2 g, 7.51 mmol) and DMAP(0.046 g, 0.375 mmol) are stirred in chloroform (7 mL). Succinicanhydride (1.127 g, 11.26 mmol) is added and the reaction is stirred atambient temperature. After 3 days the reaction was purified directly viaflash column chromatography (silica-gel, 0-10% methanol indichloromethane), which provided 2.73 g of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.91 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); 1.27-1.41 (m, 17H);1.64 (m, 2H); 2.07 (dd, J=7.0, 13.8 Hz, 4H); 2.62-2.73 (m, 4H); 2.79 (t,J=6.7 Hz, 2H); 4.11 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H); 5.32-5.44 (m, 4H) ppm.

Example 77 Compound

In a borosilicate glass vial, Intermediate 77b (250 mg, 1.280 mmol) wasstirred in dichloromethane (10 mL). DIPEA (0.671 ml, 3.84 mmol), DMAP(15.64 mg, 0.128 mmol), EDC (736 mg, 3.84 mmol), and the material fromIntermediate 77c (1032 mg, 2.82 mmol) were added sequentially. Thereaction was sealed and stirred at ambient temperature. After 2 days,the reaction was purified directly by flash column chromatography(silica gel, equilibrated with 1% formic acid in dichloromethane,purification with 0%-10% methanol in dichloromethane) to provide 916 mgof the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.24 (s, 0.5H, formate); 7.55 (s, 2H); 7.41(s, 1H); 5.43-5.31 (m, 8H); 5.20 (s, 4H); 4.16 (s, 2H); 4.08 (t, J=6.8Hz, 4H); 2.79 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H); 2.75 (s, 6H); 2.75-2.66 (m, 8H); 2.06(q, J=6.6 Hz, 8H); 1.66-1.59 (m, 4H); 1.40-1.27 (m, 32H); 0.90 (t, J=6.5Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=892.7 (MH+).

Example 78 was prepared using methods similar to those used in thesynthesis of Intermediate 18a and Example 77.

Example 78

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.37 (s, 1.6H, formate); 7.42 (s, 2H); 7.38(s, 1H); 5.18 (s, 4H); 4.10-4.05 (m, 10H); 2.74-2.65 (m, 14H); 2.31 (t,J=7.5 Hz, 4H); 1.66-1.59 (m, 12H); 1.40-1.25 (m, 40H); 0.90 (t, J=7.0Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=960.9 (MH+)

Synthesis of Example 79

In a 250 ml round-bottom flask equipped with a stirbar, suberic acid (5g, 28.7 mmol) and EDC (6.60 g, 34.4 mmol) are dissolved in DCM (150 mL).DIPEA (15.04 ml, 86 mmol) is added, followed by DMAP (1.403 g, 11.48mmol) and mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 hr beforeaddition of 1-Nonanol (5.01 ml, 28.7 mmol). Mixture stirred at roomtemperature overnight. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressureand the resulting material was purified by silica gel chromatographyusing heptanes/EtOAc as the eluent to provide 1 g of the desiredproduct. The desired product was prepared using the procedure used togenerate Example 77.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.26 (s, 2H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 5.10 (s, 4H), 4.05(t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 2.36 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.31-2.25 (m,10H), 1.69-1.58 (m, 12H), 1.36-1.27 (m, 32H), 0.88 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=760.4 (MH+).

Example 80 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 79.

Example 80

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.27 (s, 2H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 5.11 (s, 4H), 4.07(t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 2.37 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.30 (t, J=7.5Hz, 4H), 2.26 (s, 6H), 1.67-1.59 (m, 12H), 1.33-1.29 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t,J=8.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=760.4 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 81 Intermediate 81a:

Trimethyl phosphonoacetate (357 mg, 1.96 mmol) was added to a suspensionof NaH (78 mg, 1.96 mmol) in THF (10 mL) which was stirring in an icebath. After 10 min, the starting aldehyde (1 g, 1.63 mmol), made using aprocedure analogous to that in Example 1a, was dissolved in THF (5 mL)and added slowly. The reaction was stirred for 1 h and then ice coldwater (5 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was extracted withEtOAc (3×30 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodiumsulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting materialwas purified by silica gel chromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluentto provide 1.2 g of the desired material.

Rf=0.77 (silica, 10% ethyl acetate in hexane, UV)

Intermediate 81b:

Intermediate 81a (2.6 g, 3.7 mmol) in THF (75 mL) was cooled in an icebath and lithium aluminum hydride (300 mg, 7.9 mmol) was added inportions. The reaction was stirred for 45 min in cooling bath and thenquenched with ice cold water. The resulting material was filteredthrough celite and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure. Theresulting material was purified by silica gel chromatography usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 2.5 g of the desired material.

Rf=0.21 (silica, 10% EtOAc in hexane, UV and cerium molybdate)

Example 81 Compound

Example 81 was prepared from Intermediate 81b using the methods similarto those used for the synthesis of Example 13.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.34 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.32 (d, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.27-5.47 (m, 8H), 4.16 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.93 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H),2.92-3.03 (m, 2H), 2.80 (dd, J=6.4, 6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.61-2.69 (m, 4H), 2.58(s, 6H), 2.07 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 8H), 1.91-2.03 (m, 2H), 1.71-1.85 (m, J=7.8Hz, 4H), 1.42-1.52 (m, 4H), 1.23-1.41 (m, 29H), 0.91 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H)ppm.

ES-MS m/z=764.6 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 82 Intermediate 82a:

The starting alcohol (1.0 g, 2.8 mmol), made using chemistry as forIntermediate 18a, was stirred in acetone (25 mL) and cooled in an icebath. Jones' reagent (2.27 mL, 2.5 M, 5.67 mmol) was added dropwise andthe ice bath was removed. After 1 h stirring, MeOH (5 mL) was addedfollowed by EtOAc (220 mL). The resulting mixture was washed with 1:1water:brine and then brine. The resulting organic layer was dried oversodium sulfate and then the volatiles were removed under reducedpressure. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatographyusing heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 672 mg of the desiredmaterial.

¹³C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.178.3, 173.8, 130.2, 130.0, 128.0, 127.9,63.0, 34.2, 31.5, 30.4, 29.6, 29.3, 29.2, 29.1, 27.2, 25.6, 24.9, 23.7,22.5, 14.1 ppm.

Example 82 Compound

Intermediate 82a (672 mg, 1.83 mmol) was stirred in DCE (40 mL). EDC(501 mg, 2.6 mmol) was added followed by the material from Intermediate77b (170 mg, 0.87 mmol) as a solution in DCE (10 mL). TEA (0.485 mL,3.48 mmol) and DMAP (21 mg, 0.17 mmol) were added and the reaction wasstirred for 3 days at room temperature. The reaction was concentratedunder reduced pressure and the crude material was purified by silica gelchromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 359 mg of thedesired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.31-7.28 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.23 (m, 1H),5.44-5.28 (m, 8H), 5.12 (s, 4H), 4.11 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.81-2.73 (m,4H), 2.46 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 4H), 2.32-2.24 (m, 9H), 2.09-1.94 (m, 12H),1.69-1.51 (m, 5H), 1.42-1.22 (m, 28H), 0.89 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=892.7 (MH+).

Examples 83-88 were prepared using methods similar to those employed forthe preparation of Example 82.

Example 83

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.28-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.24-7.21 (m, 1H), 5.10 (s,4H), 4.05 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H), 3.43 (s, 2H), 2.36 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.29(t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 1.72-1.52 (m, 12H), 1.42-1.14 (m, 36H),0.95-0.75 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=788.4 (MH+).

Example 84

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.33 (s, 1H, formate); 7.54 (s, 2H); 7.39 (s,1H); 5.17 (s, 4H); 4.15 (s, 2H), 4.12 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 4H); 2.74 (s, 6H);2.50 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 4H); 2.30 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H); 2.04-1.97 (m, 4H);1.65-1.58 (m, 4H); 1.34-1.23 (m, 16H); 0.88 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 6H) ppm.

LCMS m/z=620.2 (MH+).

Example 85

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.30 (s, 0.6H, formate); 7.54 (s, 2H); 7.40(s, 1H); 5.15 (s, 4H); 4.15 (s, 2H); 4.06 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H); 2.74 (s,6H); 2.42 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H); 2.29 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H); 1.73-1.58 (m, 12H);1.44-1.36 (m, 4H); 1.34-1.23 (m, 16H); 0.88 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 6H) ppm.

LCMS m/z=676.2 (MH+).

Example 86

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.50 (s, 2H); 7.38 (s, 1H); 5.14 (s, 4H); 4.06(t, J=6.8 Hz, 4H); 3.97 (s, 2H); 2.63 (s, 6H); 2.39 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H);2.30 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H); 1.69-1.59 (m, 12H); 1.38-1.25 (m, 36H); 0.89 (t,J=7.0, 6H) ppm.

LCMS m/z=788.8 (MH+).

Example 87

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.52 (s, 2H); 7.38 (s, 1H); 5.15 (s, 4H); 4.06(t, J=6.7 Hz, 4H); 3.99 (s, 2H); 2.65 (s, 6H); 2.40 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H);2.30 (t, J=7.5 Hs, 4H); 1.70-1.59 (m, 12H); 1.38-1.25 (m, 28H); 0.89 (t,J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

LCMS m/z=732.8 (MH+).

Example 88

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.54 (s, 2H); 7.38 (s, 1H); 5.15 (s, 4H); 4.07(t, J=6.7 Hz, 4H); 4.02 (s, 2H); 2.66 (s, 6H); 2.42 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H);2.30 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H); 1.74-1.58 (m, 12H); 1.45-1.37 (m, 4H); 1.35-1.22(m, 24H); 0.89 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

LCMS m/z=732.8 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 89 Intermediate 89a:

To a solution of 3,5-dihydroxybenzaldehyde (1.0 g, 7.24 mmol) in acetone(35 mL) was added methyl 5-bromopentanoate (3.53 g, 18.1 mmol).Potassium carbonate (3.0 g, 22 mmol) was added and the reaction washeated to reflux in an oil bath. After heating overnight, the reactionwas cooled to room temperature and allowed to stir for 4 days. Thevolatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the material wasresuspended in DCM. The resulting mixture was filtered and the filtratewas concentrated under reduced pressure to a crude material that waspurified by silica gel chromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent toprovide 824 mg of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.89 (s, 1H), 6.99 (s, 2H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 4.01(m, 4H), 3.68 (s, 6H), 2.41 (m, 4H), 1.84 (m, 8H) ppm.

Intermediate 89b:

Intermediate 89a (824 mg, 2.25 mmol) was stirred in EtOH (15 mL).Potassium hydroxide (505 mg, 9.0 mmol) and water (5 mL) were added andthe reaction was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The material wasthen diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and washed with 1 M HCl (2×50 mL). Theresulting organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and concentratedunder reduced pressure to provide 710 mg of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.90 (s, 1H), 7.03 (s, 2H), 6.81 (s, 1H),4.02 (m, 4H), 2.29 (m, 4H), 1.6-1.8 (m, 8H) ppm.

Intermediate 89c

Intermediate 89b (710 mg, 2.1 mmol) was stirred in DCM (20 mL). Linoleylalcohol (1.40 g, 5.25 mmol) was added along with DMAP (64 mg, 0.52 mmol)and paratoluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (100 mg, 0.52 mmol). EDC (1.0g, 5.25 mmol) was then added and the reaction was stirred at roomtemperature for 48 h. The material was purified directly by silica gelchromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 1.32 g ofmaterial containing the desired product and about 30% linoleyl alcohol.The material was carried on without further purification.

Example 89 Compound

Example 89 was prepared from Intermediate 89c using methods similar tothose described in Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.46 (d, J=2.20 Hz, 2H), 6.33 (t, J=2.30 Hz,1H), 5.27-5.45 (m, 8H), 4.07 (t, J=6.80 Hz, 4H), 3.88-4.01 (m, 4H), 3.34(s, 2H), 2.78 (t, J=6.65 Hz, 4H), 2.33-2.44 (m, 4H), 2.24 (s, 6H),1.98-2.13 (m, 8H), 1.75-1.88 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.22-1.43 (m,32H), 0.90 (t, J=6.90 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=865.8 (MH+).

Example 90 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 89.

Example 90

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (br. s., 2H) 6.35 (br. s., 1H) 4.00-4.11(m, 4H) 3.94 (t, J=6.44 Hz, 4H) 2.34 (t, J=7.45 Hz, 5H) 2.27 (br. s.,3H) 1.57-1.85 (m, 12H) 1.40-1.57 (m, 4H) 1.20-1.39 (m, 40H) 0.80-0.98(m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=733.9 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 91 Intermediate 91a:

To a suspension of 2-(2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)ethanol (10 g, 68.4mmol) in DCM (100 mL) was added pyridine (25 mL). Toluenesulfonicanhydride (26.8 g, 82 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirredovernight at room temperature. The volatiles were removed under reducedpressure and the resulting material was purified by silica gelchromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 8.92 g of thedesired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.82-7.77 (m, 2H), 7.38-7.32 (m, 2H),4.21-4.07 (m, 3H), 4.05-3.99 (m, 1H), 3.55-3.49 (m, 1H), 2.45 (s, 3H),1.97-1.83 (m, 2H), 1.34 (s, 3H), 1.29 (s, 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 91b:

To a flask containing Intermediate 91a (8.92 g, 29.7 mmol) was added3,5-dixydroxybenzaldehyde (1.9 g, 13.8 mmol) and DMF (50 mL). Potassiumcarbonate (5.7 g, 41.3 mmol) was added and the reaction was heated to 80deg C. overnight. The reaction was cooled and water was added. Theresulting material was extracted with EtOAc and the combined organiclayers were dried over sodium sulfate. The volatiles were removed underreduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica gelchromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 1.9 g of thedesired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.89 (s, 1H), 7.02-6.99 (m, 2H), 6.72-6.68 (m,1H), 4.36-4.26 (m, 2H), 4.18-4.07 (m, 6H), 3.68-3.62 (m, 2H), 2.10-2.02(m, 4H), 1.43 (s, 3H), 1.37 (s 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 91c:

Intermediate 91b (1.4 g, 3.55 mmol) was stirred in DCE (35 mL).Dimethylamine (7.10 mL, 2 M in THF, 14.2 mmol) was added followed byacetic acid (0.20 mL, 3.6 mmol) and then sodium triacetoxyborohydride(1.88 g, 8.87 mmol). The reaction was capped and allowed to stir at roomtemperature overnight. The reaction was quenched with saturated aqueoussodium bicarbonate and the resulting mixture extracted with EtOAc. Thecombined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentratedunder reduced pressure to 1.34 g of a crude material that was usedwithout further purification.

Intermediate 91d:

Intermediate 91c (1.34 g, 3.16 mmol) was stirred in MeOH (20 mL).Concentrated aqueous HCl (0.19 mL, 6.33 mmol) was added and the reactionwas stirred at room temperature overnight. The volatiles were removedunder reduced pressure and the material was used without furtherpurification.

ES-MS m/z=344.2 (MH+).

Example 91 Compound

Intermediate 91d (1.0 g, 2.63 mmol) was stirred in DMF (6 mL) untildissolved. DCM (6 mL) was added, followed by pyridine (1.7 mL, 21 mmol)and DMAP (0.096 mg, 0.79 mmol). Octanoyl chloride (2.14 g, 13.16 mmol)was slowly added to the stirring reaction and the resulting mixture wasallowed to stir for 3 days at room temperature. The reaction was dilutedwith water and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate and the resultingmixture was extracted with DCM and EtOAc. The combined organic layerswere dried over sodium sulfate and the volatiles removed under reducedpressure. The material was purified using silica gel that had beenprewashed with 1% acetic acid (by volume) in DCM. The compound waseluted with EtOAc/heptanes and the fractions containing product werewashed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The resulting organicswere dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under reducedpressure. The resulting material was purified a second time on silicausing heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to yield 1.65 g of the desired product

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.59 (br s, 2H) 6.36 (br s, 1H) 5.25-5.37 (m,2H) 4.35 (dd, J=12.05, 3.26 Hz, 2H) 4.12 (dd, J=11.92, 6.15 Hz, 2H)3.91-4.09 (m, 4H) 3.58 (br s, 2H) 2.25-2.55 (m, 14H) 2.01-2.13 (m, 4H)1.49-1.70 (m, 8H) 1.13-1.39 (m, 32H) 0.77-0.99 (m, 12H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=848.6 (MH+).

Examples 92-94 were prepared using methods similar to those employed forthe preparation of Example 91.

Example 92

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.74-0.97 (m, 12H) 1.14-1.40 (m, 32H)1.51-1.71 (m, 8H) 2.07 (q, J=5.94 Hz, 4H) 2.21-2.46 (m, 14H) 3.44 (s.,2H) 3.89-4.07 (m, 4H) 4.12 (dd, J=11.92, 6.15 Hz, 2H) 4.34 (dd, J=12.05,3.26 Hz, 2H), 5.20-5.40 (m, 2H) 6.32 (t, J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.49 (d, J=2.01Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=848.3 (MH+).

Example 93

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.87 (m, 12H) 1.14-1.38 (m, 32H) 1.48-1.72 (m,8H) 2.07 (q, J=6.19 Hz, 4H) 2.22-2.41 (m, 14H) 3.44 (s., 2H) 3.87-4.07(m, 4H) 4.12 (dd, J=11.92, 6.15 Hz, 2H) 4.34 (dd, J=12.05, 3.26 Hz, 2H)5.20-5.40 (m, 2H) 6.32 (t, J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.49 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=848.3 (MH+).

Example 94

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.87 (m, 12H) 1.12-1.40 (m, 32H) 1.47-1.71 (m,8H) 2.07 (q, J=6.44 Hz, 4H) 2.18-2.38 (m, 14H) 3.47 (s, 2H) 3.85-4.06(m, 4H) 4.12 (dd, J=11.92, 6.15 Hz, 2H) 4.34 (dd, J=11.92, 3.39 Hz, 2H)5.20-5.40 (m, 2H) 6.33 (t, J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.49 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=848.3 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 95 Intermediate 95a:

3,4,5-trihydroxybenzaldehyde (600 mg, 3.89 mmol), LinOMs (4427 mg, 12.85mmol) and potassium carbonate (2690 mg, 19.47 mmol) were mixed in DMF(30 ml) and heated to 80 deg C. overnight. The reaction mixture waspoured into ice-water (100 ml) and extracted with diethyl ether (100ml×2). The organic phase was collected and dried over sodium sulfate andthe volatiles removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purifiedby chromatography on silica gel using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent toprovide 2.76 g, of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.84 (s, 1H), 7.72 (dd, J=5.77, 3.26 Hz, 1H),7.50-7.58 (m, 1H), 7.09 (s, 2H), 5.22-5.47 (m, 13H), 4.23 (t, J=6.02 Hz,1H), 3.94-4.12 (m, 7H), 2.78 (t, J=6.40 Hz, 7H), 2.06 (q, J=6.69 Hz,13H), 1.78-1.91 (m, 5H), 1.73-1.78 (m, 2H), 1.70 (dd, J=11.42, 5.40 Hz,1H), 1.58 (s, 1H), 1.42-1.55 (m, 8H) 1.22-1.42 (m, 51H) 0.82-0.98 (m,13H) ppm.

Example 95 Compound

Example 95 was prepared from Intermediate 95a using the reactionconditions similar to those used in the preparation of Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.50 (s, 2H), 5.44-5.29 (m, 12H), 4.00-3.91(m, 6H), 3.32 (s, 2H), 2.81-2.75 (m, 6H), 2.24 (s, 6H), 2.10-2.01 (m,12H), 1.85-1.65 (m, 8H), 1.52-1.24 (m, 50H), 0.92-0.86 (m, 9H) ppm.

¹³C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 152.9, 137.5, 134.1, 130.2, 130.1, 130.1,128.0, 127.9, 107.3, 73.3, 69.0, 64.7, 45.4, 31.3, 30.3, 29.7, 29.7,29.6, 29.6, 29.5, 29.4, 29.4, 29.3, 29.3, 27.3, 27.2, 27.2, 26.1, 25.6,22.6, 14.1 ppm.

Synthesis of Example 96 Intermediate 96a:

To a solution of butanediol (3.54 g, 39.3 mmol) in DCM (80 mL) was addedpyridine (1.65 mL, 20.4 mmol) and DMAP (0.38 g, 3.2 mmol). Decanoylchloride (3.0 g, 15.7 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred atroom temperature for 1 h. Volatiles were removed under reduced pressureand the resulting material was purified by silica gel chromatographyusing heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to yield 3.3 g of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.1 (m, 2H), 3.7 (m, 2H), 2.3 (m, 2H), 1.7 (m,2H), 1.6 (m, 4H), 1.3 (m, 12H), 0.9 (m, 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 96b:

Intermediate 96b was prepared from Intermediate 98a and using conditionssimilar to those used in the synthesis of Intermediate 84a.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.1 (m, 2H), 2.5 (m, 2H), 2.3 (m, 2H), 2.0 (m,2H), 1.6 (m, 2H), 1.3 (m, 12H), 0.9 (m, 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 96c:

Intermediate 98c was prepared from Intermediate 98b and 1,3-propanediolusing conditions similar to those employed in the preparation ofIntermediate 18a.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.3 (m, 2H), 4.1 (m, 2H), 3.7 (m, 2H), 2.4 (m,2H), 2.3 (m, 2H), 2.0 (m, 2H), 1.9 (m, 3H), 1.6 (m, 2H), 1.3 (m, 12H),0.9 (m, 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 96d:

Intermediate 96d was prepared from Intermediate 98c using the conditionssimilar to those employed in the synthesis of Intermediate 18b.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ δ 9.9 (s, 1H), 7.0 (s, 2H), 6.7 (s, 1H), 4.3(m, 4H), 4.1 (m, 8H), 2.4 (m, 4H), 2.3 (m, 4H), 2.2 (m, 4H), 2.0 (m,4H), 1.6 (m, 4H), 1.3 (m, 24H), 0.9 (m, 6H) ppm.

Example 96 Compound

Example 96 was prepared from Intermediate 96d using the reactionconditions similar to those used in the synthesis of Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 0.81-0.92 (m, 6H) 1.18-1.37 (m, 24H) 1.53-1.67(m, 4H) 1.96 (quin, J=6.90 Hz, 4H) 2.09 (quin, J=6.27 Hz, 4H) 2.23 (s,6H) 2.28 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 4H) 2.40 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 4H) 3.33 (s, 2H) 4.02(t, J=6.02 Hz, 4H) 4.09 (t, J=6.00 Hz, 4H) 4.26 (t, J=6.27 Hz, 4H) 6.33(t, J=2.26 Hz, 1H) 6.47 (d, J=2.26 Hz, 2H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=764.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 97 Intermediate 97a:

A solution of 9-heptadecanone (15 g, 59 mmol) andtriethylphosphonoacetate (13.2 g, 59 mmol) was stirred in THF (100 mL).To this reaction was added NaOEt (26.4 mL, 21% in EtOH, 70.7 mmol) andthe resulting solution was heated to reflux for 48 h. The reaction wasacidified with 1 M HCl and then diluted with EtOAc. The organic layerwas collected and washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. Theresulting organic material was dried over sodium sulfate and thevolatiles removed under reduced pressure to yield a crude material thatwas purified by silica gel chromatography using heptanes/EtOAc aseluent, providing 11.7 g of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 5.62 (s, 1H) 4.01-4.26 (m, 2H) 2.49-2.68 (m,2H) 2.13 (m, 2H) 1.44 (dd, J=7.33, 4.80 Hz, 4H) 1.17-1.35 (m, 23H)0.83-0.98 (m, 6H) ppm.

Intermediate 97b:

Intermediate 97a (11.75 g, 36.2 mmol) was stirred in DCM (16.5 mL) andMeOH (165 mL). Pd/C (3.85 g, 10% Pd) was added and the reaction flaskwas fitted with a balloon filled with hydrogen. The reaction was stirredat room temperature for 24 h. The reaction was degassed with nitrogenand filtered through celite with a wash of DCM and MeOH. The filtratewas collected and the volatiles removed under reduced pressure toprovide 10.6 g of material that was used without further purification.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.13 (q, J=7.16 Hz, 2H) 2.39 (t, J=7.45 Hz,2H) 2.22 (d, J=6.82 Hz, 2H) 1.84 (br. s., 1H) 1.56 (t, J=7.20 Hz, 2H)1.19-1.36 (m, 27H) 0.81-0.95 (m, 6H) ppm.

Intermediate 97c:

Intermediate 97b (10.6 g, 32.5 mmol) was stirred with NaOH (9.74 mL, 10M, 97.4 mmol) in MeOH (100 mL) and DCM (10 mL). The reaction was heatedto reflux overnight. Aqueous HCl was added to neutralize the solution,the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the resultingmaterial was taken back up in DCM. The organics were washed with aqueoussaturated sodium bicarbonate and the resulting aqueous layer wasextracted with DCM. The combined organics were dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The materialwas purified by silica gel chromatography using heptanes/EtOAc aseluent. The resulting material was taken up in DCM and loaded onto anNH₂ functionalized column. The column was washed with DCM and thenDCM/MeOH. The product was eluted with acidic methanol and the eluentconcentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was taken up in DCM andwashed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide6.5 g of the desired product.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 2.28 (d, J=7.07 Hz, 2H) 1.86 (br. s., 1H)1.15-1.44 (m, 28H) 0.82-0.97 (m, 6H) ppm.

Intermediate 97d:

A solution of 3,5-dihydroxybenzaldehyde (3 g, 22 mmol) and2-(3-bromopropoxy)tetrahydro-2H-pyran (8.11 mL, 47.8 mmol) were stirredin DMF (100 mL). Potassium carbonate (15 g, 109 mmol) was added and thereaction was heated to 80 deg C. overnight. The reaction was dilutedwith brine and EtOAc, followed by saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate.The resulting mixture was filtered and the organic layer was collected,dried over sodium sulfate, and the volatiles removed under reducedpressure. The resulting material was purified by silica gelchromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 3.8 g of thedesired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.88 (s, 1H) 6.84-7.12 (m, 2H) 6.68 (t, J=2.40Hz, 1H) 4.52-4.76 (m, 1H) 4.13 (t, J=6.32 Hz, 2H) 3.78-4.05 (m, 2H)3.44-3.73 (m, 2H) 1.97-2.27 (m, 2H) 1.79-1.92 (m, 1H) 1.67-1.79 (m, 1H)1.41-1.67 (m, 4H) ppm.

Intermediate 97e:

Intermediate 97d (2.6 g, 6.15 mmol) was stirred in MeOH (40 mL) and THF(40 mL) and HCl (24.6 mL, 1 N in water, 24.6 mmol). The reaction wasstirred at room temperature for 4 h. Saturated aqueous sodiumbicarbonate was added and the reaction was concentrated under reducedpressure. The resulting mixture was extracted with dichloromethane andthe combined organics were dried over sodium sulfate. The volatiles wereremoved under reduced pressure and the resulting material was purifiedby silica gel chromatography using heptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide1.4 g of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ□ 9.90 (s, 1H) 7.03 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 2H) 6.73 (t,J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 4.17 (t, J=6.06 Hz, 4H) 3.88 (t, J=5.81 Hz, 4H) 1.98-2.20(m, 4H) ppm.

Intermediate 97f:

Intermediate 97e (1.0 g, 3.93 mmol), the acid from Intermediate 99c(1.41 g, 4.72 mmol), EDC (0.90 g, 4.7 mmol), DIEA (2.06 mL, 11.8 mmol),and DMAP (0.48 g, 3.93 mmol) were dissolved in DCE (20 mL) and theresulting solution was split into two portions. Each portion was heatedin a microwave reactor for 20 min at 70 deg C. The resulting mixtureswere combined and purified directly by silica gel chromatography usingheptanes/EtOAc as eluent to provide 680 mg of the desired material.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.90 (s, 1H) 7.02 (ddd, J=7.83, 2.27, 1.26 Hz,1H) 6.72 (t, J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 4.22-4.35 (m, 2H) 4.13-4.22 (m, 2H) 4.09 (t,J=6.06 Hz, 1H) 3.88 (q, J=5.81 Hz, 2H) 2.25 (d, J=6.82 Hz, 2H) 1.99-2.19(m, 4H) 1.84 (br. s., 1H) 1.14-1.38 (m, 30H) 0.89 (td, J=6.95, 3.54 Hz,6H) ppm.

Intermediate 97 g:

Intermediate 97 g was prepared from Intermediate 99f using theconditions used to prepare Intermediate 18a.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.90 (s, 1H) 7.01 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 2H) 6.70 (t,J=2.27 Hz, 1H) 5.28-5.44 (m, 4H) 4.27 (t, J=6.32 Hz, 4H) 4.02-4.17 (m,4H) 2.78 (t, J=6.44 Hz, 2H) 2.32 (t, J=7.45 Hz, 2H) 2.25 (d, J=6.82 Hz,2H) 2.14 (quin, J=6.19 Hz, 4H) 1.98-2.09 (m, 4H) 1.84 (br. s., 1H)1.58-1.70 (m, 2H) 1.18-1.41 (m, 42H) 0.77-0.99 (m, 9H) ppm.

Example 97 Compound

Example 97 was prepared from Intermediate 97 g using conditions similarto those used to prepare Example 39.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.49 (br. s., 2H) 6.27-6.43 (m, 1H) 5.29-5.46(m, 4H) 4.26 (t, J=6.32 Hz, 4H) 4.03 (t, J=6.19 Hz, 4H) 3.36 (br. s.,2H) 2.78 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 2H) 2.18-2.39 (m, 10H) 1.96-2.18 (m, 8H) 1.84(br. s., 1H) 1.48-1.73 (m, 4H) 1.17-1.47 (m, 40H) 0.74-1.03 (m, 9H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=827.6 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 98 Intermediate 98a:

Intermediate 98a was prepared from Intermediate 79a using conditionssimilar to those employed in the preparation of Intermediate 18a.

Rf=0.51 (silica, 5% MeOH in DCM, cerium molybdate).

Example 98 Compound

Example 98 was prepared from Intermediate 98a using conditions similarto those described for the preparation of Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.47 (s, 2H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 4.25 (t, J=6.3 Hz,4H), 4.07-4.01 (m, 8H), 3.34 (s, 2H), 2.29 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 8H), 2.24 (s,6H), 2.09 (quin, J=6.2 Hz, 4H), 1.65-1.58 (m, 12H), 1.31-1.28 (m, 32H),0.88 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=848.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 99 Intermediate 99a:

Prepared from 1,10-decanediol and octanoyl chloride using conditionssimilar to those used in the preparation of Intermediate 96a.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.06 (t, J=6.65 Hz, 2H), 3.64 (t, J=6.65 Hz,2H), 2.29 (t, J=7.65 Hz, 2H), 1.50-1.70 (m, 5H), 1.18-1.41 (m, 19H),0.88 (t, J=7.28 Hz, 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 99b:

A mixture of Intermediate 99a (3.34 g, 11.1 mmol) and triethylamine (6.2mL, 44 mmol) in DCM (40 mL) was stirred in an ice bath and MsCl (1.04mL, 13.3 mmol) was added. The reaction was allowed to warm to roomtemperature and was stirred overnight. The reaction was then poured intoice water. The resulting organic phase was collected, dried over sodiumsulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield 4.2 g ofmaterial that was used without further purification.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.23 (t, J=6.57 Hz, 1H), 4.06 (t, J=6.82 Hz,2H), 3.15 (s, 1H), 3.01 (s, 1H), 2.30 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 2H), 1.75 (dd,J=8.08, 6.82 Hz, 1H), 1.62 (t, J=6.95 Hz, 5H), 1.40 (t, J=7.33 Hz, 4H),1.18-1.34 (m, 17H), 0.89 (t, J=7.10 Hz, 3H) ppm.

Example 99 Compound

The final compound was then obtained from Intermediate 99b by followingprocedures similar to those used in the preparation of Intermediate 97dand Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.54 (s, 2H); 7.38 (s, 1H); 5.15 (s, 4H); 4.07(t, J=6.7 Hz, 4H); 4.02 (s, 2H); 2.66 (s, 6H); 2.42 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H);2.30 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H); 1.74-1.58 (m, 12H); 1.45-1.37 (m, 4H); 1.35-1.22(m, 24H); 0.89 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 6H) ppm.

LCMS m/z=732.8 (MH+).

Example 100 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 99.

Example 100

Intermediate 77b was reacted with the acid prepared analogously toIntermediate 79a, and Intermediate 97c under the conditions used toprepare Example 77.

Example 101

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.27 (s, 2H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 5.11 (s, 4H), 4.06(t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 2.37 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.32-2.29 (m,4H), 2.26 (s, 6H), 1.88 (m, 1H), 1.70-1.59 (m, 6H), 1.35-1.26 (m, 42H),0.89 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 9H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=744.4 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 102 Intermediate 102a

To a suspension of potassium carbonate (12.1 g, 88 mmol) in dimethylformamide (100 mL) was added methyl 2-(3,5-dihydroxyphenyl)acetate (4.0g, 22 mmol) and linoleyl mesylate (16.6 g, 48 mmol). The reaction washeated in a 100° C. bath for 4 h, then allowed to cool to ambienttemperature. Water (100 mL) was added, and the reaction was extractedwith ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were washedwith brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography usingethyl acetate and n-hexane as eluent to provide the desired compound.

ES-MS m/z=680 (MH+).

Intermediate 102b:

To a suspension of lithium aluminum hydride (671 mg, 17.6 mmol) intetrahydrofuran (50 mL) was slowly added a solution of Intermediate 104a(6 g, 8.8 mmol) in THF (38 mL). The reaction was then stirred at ambienttemperature for 3 h, at which time the reaction was cooled in a 0° C.bath and quenched with water (5 mL) and ethyl acetate (5 mL). Thereaction was stirred for 10 min, then filtered over celite. The filtratewas concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the desired compound.

ES-MS m/z=652 (MH+).

Intermediate 102c:

To a solution of Intermediate 102b (5.3 g, 8.1 mmol) in dichloromethane(86 mL) was added Dess-Martin periodinane (10.3 g, 24 mmol). Thereaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 h, at which time thereaction was quenched by the addition of aqueous sodium bicarbonatesolution. The reaction was extracted with dichloromethane and thecombined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentratedunder reduced pressure. The residue was purified with silica-gelchromatography using ethyl acetate and n-hexane as eluent to provide thedesired compound.

ES-MS m/z=649 (MH+).

Example 102 Compound

To a solution of Intermediate 102c (2.5 g, 3.8 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL)and tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was added dimethylamine hydrochloride (627mg, 5.7 mmol), followed by triethylamine (1.1 mL, 7.7 mmol) and titanium(IV) isopropoxide (2.1 g, 7.7 mmol). The reaction was stirred at ambienttemperature, at which time sodium borohydride (216 mg, 5.7 mmol) wasadded. The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for an additional10 h. The reaction was quenched by slow addition of water (2 mL), andthe resultant mixture was filtered through celite. The residue waswashed with tetrahydrofuran and the combined filtrates were concentratedunder reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica-gelchromatography, using methanol in dichloromethane with 0.1% ammoniumhydroxide as eluent, to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.36 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H); 6.32 (t, J=2.0 Hz,1H); 5.44-5.32 (m, 8H), 3.93 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 4H); 2.81-2.74 (m, 6H);2.62-2.58 (m, 2H); 2.36 (s, 6H); 2.08 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 4H); 2.06 (t, J=6.9Hz, 4H); 1.78 (quin, J=7.0 Hz, 4H); 1.48-1.27 (m, 32H), 0.90 (t, J=7.0Hz, 6H).

ES-MS m/z=678.7 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 103 Intermediate 103a:

To a suspension of sodium hydride (60% dispersion, 18 mmol) intetrahydrofuran (50 mL), cooled in a 0° C. bath, was addedtrimethylphosphonoacetate (1.0 g, 18 mmol). The reaction was stirred for10 minutes, then a solution of the aldehyde, prepared using conditionssimilar to those in Example 1a, (7.5 g, 12 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (25mL) was added slowly. The reaction was stirred for an additional 1 h,then ice-water (5 mL) was added. The reaction was extracted with ethylacetate (3×100 mL), and the combined organic phases were dried oversodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue waspurified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and n-hexane aseluent to provide the desired compound.

Rf=0.77 (silica, 10% EtOAc in hexane, UV).

Intermediate 103b:

To a solution Intermediate 103a (7.7 g, 11.1 mmol) in THF (100 mL),cooled in a 0° C. bath, was added lithium aluminum hydride (927 mg, 24mmol). The reaction was stirred for 45 minutes, then ice-water was addedslowly. The resulting mixture was filtered through celite and thefiltrate concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purifiedby silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and n-hexane as eluentto provide the desired compound.

Rf=0.21 (silica, 10% EtOAc in hexane, UV and cerium molybdate).

Intermediate 103c:

A solution of Intermediate 105b (2.5 g, 3.8 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (40mL) was added to a second solution of 2-iodoxybenzoic acid (2.3 g, 8.3mmol) in DMSO (8 mL). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperaturefor 2 h. The reaction was diluted with ether and filtered throughcelite. Water was added, and the reaction was extracted withdichloromethane. The combined organic layers were dried over sodiumsulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue waspurified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and n-hexane aseluent to provide the desired compound.

Rf=0.75 (silica, 10% EtOAc in hexane, UV and cerium molybdate).

Example 103 Compound

To a solution of Intermediate 103c (2.0 g, 3.0 mmol) in ethanol (40 mL)was added dimethylamine hydrochloride (742 mg, 9.0 mmol), triethylamine(913 mg, 9.0 mmol), and titanium (IV) isopropoxide (2.5 g, 9.0 mmol).The reaction was stirred at amine temperature for 10 h, at which timesodium borohydride (172 mg, 4.5 mmol) was added. The reaction wasstirred at ambient temperature for an additional 10 h, at which timewater (2 mL) was added. The reaction was filtered through celite and theresidue washed with tetrahydrofuran. The filtrate was concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica-gel chromatographywith methanol and dichloromethane eluent modified with 0.1% ammoniumhydroxide to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.26 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H), 6.21 (t, J=2.3 Hz,1H), 5.22-5.35 (m, 8H), 3.84 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 4H), 2.71 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 4H),2.49 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 2.22 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.15 (s, 6H), 1.98 (q,J=6.9 Hz, 8H), 1.65-1.74 (m, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 1.33-1.42 (m, 5H), 1.15-1.33(m, 33H), 0.82 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=692.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 104 Intermediate 104a:

To a suspension of sodium hydride (1.05 g, 26 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran(40 mL), was added diethyl malonate (7 g, 44 mmol). Once evolution ofgas had ceased, ((3-bromopropxy)methyl)benzene (5 g, 22 mmol) was added.The reaction mixture was heated in a 90° C. bath for 6 h, then cooled toambient temperature. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (100mL) and washed with water (100 mL). The aqueous layer was separated andextracted with diethyl ether (2×100 mL). The combined organic layerswere dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was purified by silica-gel chromatography withethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.31-7.38 (m, 4H), 7.25-7.31 (m, 1H), 4.50 (s,2H), 4.10-4.27 (m, 7H), 3.50 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 2H), 3.32-3.41 (m, 2H),1.93-2.08 (m, 2H), 1.60-1.73 (m, 2H), 1.20-1.38 (m, 10H) ppm.

Intermediate 104b:

To a solution of Intermediate 104a (7 g, 23 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran(100 mL), cooled in a 0° C. bath, was added lithium aluminum hydride(2.58 g, 68 mmol). The cooling bath was removed and the mixture wasstirred at ambient temperature overnight. Ice was added to the reaction,and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase wasdried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. Theresidue was purified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate andheptanes as eluent to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.27-7.39 (m, 5H), 4.51 (s, 2H), 3.75-3.88 (m,2H), 3.60-3.73 (m, 2H), 3.41-3.55 (m, 2H), 2.39 (t, J=5.1 Hz, 2H), 1.76(dt, J=7.2, 3.5 Hz, 1H), 1.59-1.71 (m, 3H), 1.32-1.45 (m, 2H)

Intermediate 104c:

To a mixture of Intermediate 104b (600 mg, 2.7 mmol), pyridine (466 mg,5.9 mmol) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (16 mg, 0.13 mmol) indichloromethane (30 mL) was added hexanoyl chloride (792 mg, 5.9 mmol).The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 h, then was pouredinto 6M aqueous HCl (20 mL). The mixture was extracted with diethylether (2×40 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over sodiumsulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue waspurified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and heptanes aseluent to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.27-7.39 (m, 5H), 4.43 (s, 2H), 3.96-4.06 (m,4H), 3.39-3.42 (t, 2H), 2.20-2.24 (t, 4H), 1.94 (m, 1H), 1.52-1.60 (m,8H), 1.39 (m, 2H), 1.17-1.26 (m, 10H), 0.80-0.85 (t, 6H) ppm.

Intermediate 104d:

Intermediate 104c (1 g, 2.4 mmol) and palladium (10% by weight oncarbon, 20 mg) were taken into methanol (10 mL). The reaction waspressurized with hydrogen to 54 psi and stirred at ambient temperatureovernight. The pressure was released and the reaction was filtered. Thefiltrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the desiredcompound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.06-4.14 (m, 4H), 3.66-3.70 (m, 2H),2.03-2.06 (m, 1H), 1.59-1.69 (m, 6H), 1.46-1.48 (m, 2H), 1.29-1.36 (m,10H), 0.89-0.93 (m, 6H) ppm.

Intermediate 104e

To a solution of Intermediate 104d (760 mg, 2.3 mmol) in acetone (10mL), cooled in a 0° C. bath, was added Jones' reagent (2 M, 1.8 mmol).The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 h. Methanol (1 mL)was added and the reaction was stirred for 5 min, then concentratedunder reduced pressure. The residue was taken into ethyl acetate (50 mL)and water (540 mL), and the organic phase was collected, dried oversodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue waspurified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and heptanes aseluent to provide the expected product.

ES-MS m/z=343 (M-H−).

Intermediate 104f:

To a mixture of the THP protected 1,4-butanediol (9.2 g, 53 mmol) andmethanesulfonyl chloride (7.26 g, 63 mmol) in dichloromethane (50 mL),cooled in a 0° C. bath, was added triethylamine (16.0 g, 158 mmol). Thecooling bath was removed, and the reaction was stirred at ambienttemperature for 30 minutes. The reaction was poured into ice water. Theorganic phase was separated, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentratedunder reduced pressure to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 4.49-4.51 (m, 1H), 4.22 (t, 2H), 3.69-3.80 (m,2H), 3.33-3.47 (m, 2H), 2.95 (s, 3H), 1.44-1.83 (m, 11H) ppm.

Intermediate 104 g:

A mixture of Intermediate 104f (20.4 g, 81 mmol),3,5-dihydroxy-4-methylbenzoic acid (4.12 g, 25 mmol), and potassiumcarbonate (13.55 g, 98 mmol) in dimethylformamide (100 mL) was heated inan 80° C. bath overnight. The reaction was cooled to ambient temperatureand poured into ice-water (150 mL). The mixture was extracted withdiethyl ether (2×150 mL) and the combined organic phases were dried oversodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue waspurified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and heptanes aseluent to provide the desired compound.

ES-MS m/z=479 (M-1).

Intermediate 104h:

A mixture of Intermediate 104 g (2.07 g, 4.3 mmol), linoleyl mesylate(1.78 g, 5.2 mmol) and potassium carbonate (2.38 g, 17.2 mmol) indimethylformamide (20 mL) was heated in an 80° C. bath overnight. Thereaction was cooled to ambient temperature and poured into ice-water.The mixture was extracted with diethyl ether (2×100 mL). The organicphases were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica-gel chromatographywith ethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent to provide the desiredproduct.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.20 (s, 2H), 5.34-5.42 (m, 4H), 4.60-4.63 (m,2H), 4.36 (t, 2H), 4.00-4.08 (m, 4H), 3.83-3.86 (m, 4H), 3.47-3.51 (m,4H), 2.80 (t, 2H), 2.16 (s, 3H), 2.06-2.08 (m, 5H), 1.73-1.84 (m, 14H),1.51-1.60 (m, 20H), 1.29-1.37 (m, 18H), 0.90 (m, 4H) ppm.

Intermediate 104i:

To a solution of Intermediate 104h (1.55 g, 2.1 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran(25 mL), cooled in a 0° C. bath, was added lithium aluminum hydride (89mg, 2.3 mmol). The cooling bath was removed and the reaction was stirredovernight. Ice was added, and the mixture was extracted with ethylacetate. The organic phase was separated, dried over sodium sulfate, andconcentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified bysilica-gel chromatography using ethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent toprovide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.54 (s, 2H), 5.34-5.44 (m, 4H), 3.97-4.03 (m,4H), 3.85-3.87 (m, 2H), 3.49-3.52 (m, 2H), 2.80 (t, 2H), 2.11 (s, 3H),2.07-2.08 (m, 4H), 1.72-1.90 (m, 18H), 1.26-1.35 (m, 16H), 0.91 (t, 4H)ppm.

Intermediate 104j:

To a mixture of Intermediate 104i (580 mg, 1.0 mmol) and methanesulfonylchloride (143 mg, 1.2 mmol) in dichloromethane (20 mL), cooled in a 00°C. bath, was added triethylamine (420 mg, 4.2 mmol). The cooling bathwas removed and the reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 30minutes, at which time the reaction was poured into ice-water. Theorganic phase was collected, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentratedunder reduced pressure to provide the desired compound.

ES-MS m/z=586 (M-50).

Intermediate 104k:

Intermediate 104j (660 mg, 1.0 mmol), sodium iodide (600 mg, 4.0 mmol),and dimethylamine (2 M in tetrahydrofuran, 2 mL) were taken intodimethylformamide (5 mL). The reaction was sealed and heated to 120° C.by microwave irradiation for 40 minutes. The reaction was cooled toambient temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residuewas taken into ethyl acetate (50 mL) and washed with water (50 mL). Theorganic phase was collected, dried over sodium sulfate and concentratedunder reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gelchromatography using dichloromethane and methanol as eluent to providethe desired compound.

ES-MS m/z=586.3 (MH+).

Intermediate 104l:

To a solution of Intermediate 104k (520 mg, 0.89 mmol) in methanol (10mL) was added aqueous HCl (2 M, 2 mL). The reaction was stirred atambient temperature for 30 minutes, then concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was taken into toluene (3 mL) and concentratedunder reduced pressure to provide the desired compound ES-MS m/z=502.3(MH+).

Example 104 Compound

To a solution of Intermediate 104e (250 mg, 0.73 mmol) was added EDCl(167 mg, 0.871 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.190 mL, 1.1 mmol) and4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (1.8 mg, 0.015 mmol). The reaction was stirredfor 1 h at ambient temperature, then the alcohol of Experiment 104l (480mg, 0.892 mmol) was added. The reaction was stirred at ambienttemperature overnight and then concentrated under reduced pressure. Theresidue was purified by silica gel chromatography with dichloromethaneand methanol with 1% acetic acid modifier. Product containing fractionswere washed with sodium bicarbonate solution and concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was repurified by silica gelchromatography with ethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent to provide thedesired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (s, 1H), 6.47 (s, 1H), 5.32-5.44 (m, 4H),3.95-4.19 (m, 10H), 3.37 (s, 2H), 2.80 (t, J=8 Hz, 2H), 2.42 (t, J=8 Hz,2H), 2.32 (t, J=8 Hz, 4H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 2.10 (s, 3H), 2.08 (dd, J=8 Hz,4H), 1.86 (q, J=5 Hz, 4H), 1.64 (m, 4H), 1.27-1.48 (m, 24H), 0.91 (t,J=8 Hz, 9H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=828.4 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 105 Intermediate 105a:

To a solution of decanoyl chloride (3.73 g, 20 mmol) and pyridine (3.10g, 39 mmol) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was added 8-aminocaprylic acid(3.27 g, 21 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 2h. The mixture was diluted with water and dichloromethane, and theaqueous phase was adjusted to pH between 4 and 6 with 1N aqueous HCl andsodium bicarbonate solutions. The organic phase was separated and washedwith water. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulfate andconcentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified bysilica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent toprovide the desired compound.

Rf=0.25 (silica, 5% MeOH in DCM, cerium molybdate).

Example 105 Compound

Example 105 was prepared from Intermediate 105a using conditions similarto those described for the synthesis of Example 77.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.21 (s, 2H), 7.18 (s, 1H), 5.90 (t, J=5.4 Hz,2H), 5.05 (s, 4H), 3.38 (s, 2H), 3.17 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 4H), 2.31 (t, J=7.5Hz, 4H), 2.20 (s, 6H), 2.11 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 1.62-1.53 (m, 8H),1.46-1.39 (m, 4H), 1.27-1.21 (m, 36H), 0.82 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=786.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 106 Intermediate 106a

To a solution of 4-nitrophenylchloroformate (3.75 g, 19 mmol),4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (0.65 g, 5.3 mmol) and pyridine (3.15 g, 40mmol) in dichloromethane (30 mL) was added tert-butyl 6-hydroxyhexanoate(2.5 g, 13 mmol). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperatureovernight. Nonanol (5.75 g, 40 mmol) was added and the mixture wasstirred at ambient temperature overnight. The mixture was concentratedunder reduced pressure, and the residue was purified by silica-gelchromatography with ethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent to provide thedesired compound.

Rf=0.58 (silica, 20% EtOAc in Heptane, cerium molybdate).

Intermediate 106b:

A solution of Intermediate 106a (2.42 g, 6.7 mmol) in trifluoroaceticacid (3.0 mL) was swirled for 1 min, then concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was taken into dichloromethane (10 mL), andconcentrated under reduced pressure to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 10.20 (s, br, 1H), 4.18-4.13 (m, 4H), 2.45 (t,J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 1.76-1.64 (m, 6H), 1.50-1.27 (m, 14H), 0.89 (m, 3H) ppm.

Example 106 Compound

Example 106 was prepared from Intermediate 106b using conditions similarto those employed in the synthesis of Example 77.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.26 (s, 2H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 5.10 (s, 4H), 4.12(t, J=6.7 Hz, 8H), 3.43 (s, 2H), 2.38 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.25 (s, 6H),1.73-1.62 (m, 12H), 1.46-1.27 (m, 28H), 0.88 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=764.3 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 107 Intermediate 107a

To a solution of 1,3-dicaprylin (1.0 g, 2.9 mmol) in toluene (12 mL) wasadded succinic anhydride (0.320 g, 3.2 mmol). The reaction was sealedand heated under microwave irradiation at 140° C. for 40 minutes. Thereaction was cooled to ambient temperature and concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was suspended in DCM and filtered throughcelite. The filtrate is concentrated under reduced pressure to providethe desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 13.26 (s, br, 1H), 5.32-5.26 (m, 1H),4.35-4.28 (m, 2H), 4.23-4.15 (m, 2H), 2.70-2.65 (m, 4H), 2.38-2.31 (m,4H), 1.70-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.40-1.20 (m, 16H), 0.91-0.88 (m, 6H) ppm.

Example 107 Compound

Example 107 was prepared from Intermediate 107a using conditions similarto those described for the synthesis of Example 77.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.27 (s, 2H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 5.30-5.25 (m, 2H),5.13 (s, 4H), 4.34-4.28 (m, 4H), 4.21-4.13 (m, 4H), 3.43 (s, 2H),2.70-2.67 (m, 8H), 2.35-2.30 (m, 8H), 2.25 (s, 6H), 1.65-1.58 (m, 8H),1.32-1.27 (m, 32H), 0.88 (m, 12H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=1048.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 108 Intermediate 108a:

To a solution of linoleic acid (2.33 g, 8.3 mmol) in dichloroethane (21mL) was added EDCl (2.41 g, 12.6 mmol), DIPEA (1.63 g, 12.6 mmol), andDMAP (0.10 g, 0.84 mmol). The diol, prepared using conditions similar tothose in Example 99e, was added and the reaction was sealed and heatedunder microwave irradiation at 80° C. for 20 minutes. The reaction wascooled to ambient temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure.The residue was purified by silica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetateand heptanes as eluent, followed by methanol and dichloromethane aseluent to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.90 (s, 1H), 7.00 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (d,J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 5.22-5.47 (m, 4H), 4.15 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.97-4.10 (m,2H), 2.77 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.31 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 2H), 1.97-2.14 (m, 4H),1.72-1.97 (m, 5H), 1.46-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.23-1.45 (m, 15H), 0.89 (t, J=6.8Hz, 3H) ppm.

Intermediate 108b:

To a solution of dodec-8-enoic acid (60.1 mg, 0.30 mmol) indichloroethane (690 uL) was added EDCl (79 mg, 0.41 mmol),diisopropylethylamine (53 mg, 0.41 mmol), and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine(3.4 mg, 0.03 mmol). Intermediate 110a (150 mg, 0.28 mmol) was added,and the reaction was sealed and heated under microwave irradiation at80° C. for 20 minutes. The reaction was concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was purified by silica-gel chromatography withethyl acetate and heptanes as eluent followed by methanol anddichloromethane as eluent to provide the desired compound.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.90 (s, 1H), 7.00 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.69 (t,J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 5.23-5.45 (m, 6H), 4.15 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 4H), 4.03 (t, J=5.9Hz, 4H), 2.77 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.31 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 1.94-2.12 (m,8H), 1.75-1.94 (m, 8H), 1.51-1.72 (m, 6H), 1.21-1.45 (m, 23H), 0.79-1.02(m, 6H) ppm.

Example 108 Compound

Example 108 was prepared from Intermediate 108b using conditions similarto those employed in the synthesis of Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.48 (d, J=2.26 Hz, 2H) 6.35 (t, J=1.00 Hz,1H) 5.37 (d, J=4.77 Hz, 5H) 4.15 (s, 4H) 3.98 (s, 4H) 3.36 (s, 2H)2.74-2.83 (m, 2H) 2.32 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 4H) 2.25 (s, 6H) 1.96-2.11 (m, 8H)1.77-1.91 (m, 8H) 1.60 (s, 8H) 1.27-1.43 (m, 23H) 0.88-0.95 (m, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=754.5 (MH+).

Example 109 was prepared using methods similar to those employed for thepreparation of Example 108.

Example 109

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.49 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 2H) 6.36 (t, J=4.30 Hz,1H) 5.37 (d, J=5.77 Hz, 4H) 4.11-4.19 (m, 4H) 3.98 (t, J=5.65 Hz, 4H)3.40 (s, 2H) 2.79 (t, J=6.65 Hz, 2H) 2.23-2.34 (m, 10H) 2.07 (d, J=7.78Hz, 5H) 1.79-1.90 (m, 9H) 1.23-1.40 (m, 44H) 0.86-0.94 (m, 9H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=854.5 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 110 Intermediate 110a:

Intermediate 110a was prepared using conditions similar to thoseemployed in the synthesis of Intermediate 104d. This intermediate wasused directly in the next step without purification.

Intermediate 110b:

Intermediate 110b was prepared from Intermediate 110a using conditionssimilar to those employed in the synthesis of Intermediate 104f andIntermediate 104 g.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.87 (s, 1H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.67 (s, 1H),3.96-4.11 (m, 12H), 2.29 (t, 8H), 2.00 (m, 2H), 1.76-1.82 (m, 4H),1.58-1.61 (m, 12H), 1.41-1.45 (m, 4H), 1.25-1.27 (m, 34H), 0.87 (t, 12H)ppm.

Example 110 Compound

Example 110 was prepared from Intermediate 110c using conditions similarto those described for the preparation of Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.49-6.44 (m, 2H), 6.35-6.31 (m, 1H),4.14-4.01 (m, 8H), 3.97-3.90 (m, 4H), 3.35 (s, 2H), 2.34-2.27 (m, 8H),2.25 (s, 6H), 2.08-1.98 (m, 2H), 1.82-1.71 (m, 4H), 1.68-1.38 (m, 16H),1.36-1.19 (m, 32H), 0.93-0.84 (m, 12H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=932.6 (MH+).

Synthesis of Example 111 Intermediate 111a:

To a solution of octanoyl chloride (12.3 g, 75 mmol) in dichloromethane(50 mL) was added DMAP (1.84, 15 mmol) and pyridine (11.9 g, 150 mmol).The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 5 min, then2-(hydroxymethyl)-1,3-propanediol (4.0 g, 38 mmol) was added. Thereaction was stirred at ambient temperature overnight, then wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified bysilica-gel chromatography with ethyl acetate and heptane to provide thedesired product.

Rf=0.21 (silica, 20% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate).

Intermediate 111 b:

Intermediate 111 b was prepared from Intermediate 111a using conditionssimilar to those used to prepare Intermediate 18b.

Rf=0.44 (silica, 20% EtOAc in heptanes, cerium molybdate).

Example 111 Compound

Example 111 was prepared from Intermediate 111b using conditions similarto those employed to prepare Example 33.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.51 (s, 2H), 6.37 (s, 1H), 4.25-4.22 (m, 8H),4.00-3.98 (m, 4H), 3.52 (s, br, 2H), 2.53-2.50 (m, 2H), 2.34-2.30 (m,14H), 1.65-1.58 (m, 8H), 1.31-1.25 (m, 32H), 0.87 (m, 12H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=848.4 (MH+).

Example 112

Example 112 was prepared from Intermediate 38b using conditions similarto those employed to prepare Example 38.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 6.52 (s, 2H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 5.44-5.32 (m, 8H),4.15 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 4H), 3.98 (t, J=5.1 Hz, 4H), 3.57 (s, 2H), 2.79 (t,J=6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.54 (br s, 4H), 2.32 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 2.07 (q, J=6.7Hz, 8H), 1.79-1.90 (m, 12H), 1.68-1.59 (m, 5H), 1.42-1.27 (m, 27H), 0.91(t, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.

ES-MS m/z=862.8 (MH+).

Lipid Compositions

The lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) were formed by mixing equal volumes oflipids dissolved in alcohol with siRNA dissolved in a citrate buffer byan impinging jet process. The lipid solution contains a cationic lipidcompound of the invention, a helper lipid (cholesterol), an optionalneutral lipid (DSPC) and a PEG (PEG) lipid at a concentration of 8-16mg/mL with a target of 12 mg/mL in an alcohol. The relative molar ratiosof each lipid component in the formulations of this invention arereported in Tables 4 and 5. The siRNA to total lipid ratio isapproximately 0.05 (wt/wt). Where a LNP formulation contains four lipidcomponents, the molar ratios correspond to the type of lipid as itappears in the first four columns of the table, in the order that theyappear. The ratio of the lipids ranges from 20 to 70 mole percent forthe cationic lipid with a target of 40-60, the mole percent of helperlipid ranges from 20 to 70 with a target of 30 to 50, the mole percentof neutral lipid ranges from 0-30, the mole percent of PEG lipid has arange from 1 to 6 with a target of 2 to 5. The concentration of siRNAsolution ranges from 0.7 to 1.0 mg/mL with a target of 0.8 to 0.9 mg/mLin a sodium citrate: sodium chloride buffer pH 4-6, with a target of4.5-5.5. The LNPs are formed by mixing equal volumes of lipid solutionin ethanol with siRNA dissolved in a citrate buffer by an impinging jetprocess through a mixing device with ID ranging from 0.25 to 2.0 mm at aflow rate from 10 to 640 mL/min. The mixed LNP solution is held at roomtemperature for 0-24 hrs prior to a dilution step. The solution is thenconcentrated and diafiltered with suitable buffer by ultrafiltrationprocess using membranes with a MW cutoff from 30 to 500 KD. The finalproduct is sterile filtered and stored at 4° C.

siRNA's

The siRNA used in the lipid nanoparticles described above was made up ofdouble stranded siRNA sequences specific to a target mRNA sequence.

1. FVII siRNA duplex sequence

(SEQ ID NO: 1) 5′ UUu AAU UGA AAC cAA GAc Auu 3′ (SEQ ID NO: 2) 5′uGu cuu GGu uuc AAu uAA Auu 3′

2. PLK1-424 siRNA duplex sequence

(SEQ ID NO: 3) 5′ UAU UUA AgG AGG GUG AuC Uuu 3′ (SEQ ID NO: 4) 5′AGA Uca CCC Ucc uuA AAU auu 3′

The following abbreviations are used in these sequences:

-   -   A=adenosine    -   U=uridine    -   G=guanosine    -   C=cytosine    -   a=2′-O-methyl-adenosine    -   u=2′-O-methyl-uridine    -   g=2′-O-methyl-guanosine    -   c=2′-O-methyl-cytosine

pKa Measurements

Unless indicated otherwise, all pKa's referred to herein were measuredat standard temperature and pressure. Also, unless otherwise indicated,all references to pKa are references to pKa measured using the followingtechnique.

2 mM solution of lipid in ethanol was prepared by weighing the lipid andthen dissolving it in ethanol. 0.3 mM solution of fluorescent probe TNSin ethanol:methanol 9:1 was prepared by first making 3 mM solution ofTNS in methanol and then diluting to 0.3 mM with ethanol.

An aqueous buffer containing 200 mM sodium phosphate dibasic and 100 mMcitric acid was prepared. The buffer was split into twelve parts and thepH adjusted either with 12N HCl or 6N NaOH to 4.21-4.33, 4.86-4.99,5.23-5.37, 5.46-5.54, 5.65-5.74, 5.82-5.89, 6.09-6.18, 6.21-6.32,6.45-6.52, 6.66-6.72, 6.83-6.87, 7.19-7.28. 400 uL of 2 mM lipidsolution and 800 uL of 0.3 mM TNS solution were mixed.

Using the Hamilton Microlab Star high throughput liquid handler andHamilton run control software Software, 7.5 uL of probe/lipid mix wereadded to 242.5 uL of buffer in a 1 mL 96 well plate (model NUNC 260252,Nalgae Nunc International). This was done with all twelve buffers.

After mixing in 1 mL 96 well plate, 100 uL of each probe/lipid/buffermixture was transferred to a 250 uL black with clear bottom 96 wellplate (model COSTAR 3904, Corning).

The fluorescence measurements are carried out on the SpectraMax M5spectrophotometer using software SoftMax pro 5.2 and followingparameters:

Read Mode: Fluorescence, Top read

Wavelengths: Ex 322 nm, Em 431 nm, Auto Cutoff On 420 nm

Sensitivity: Readings 6, PMT: Auto

Automix: Before: Off

Autocalibrate: On

Assay plate type: 96 Well Standard clrbtm

Wells to read: Read entire plate

Settling time: Off

Column Wav. Priority: Column priority

Carriage Speed: Normal

Auto read: Off

After the measurement, the background fluorescence value of an emptywell on the 96 well plate was subtracted from each probe/lipid/buffermixture. The fluorescence intensity values were then normalized to thevalue at lowest pH. The normalized fluorescence intensity vs. pH chartwas then plotted in the Microsoft Excel software. The twelve points wereconnected with a smooth line.

The point on the line at which the normalized fluorescence intensity wasequal to 0.5 was found. The pH corresponding to normalized fluorescenceintensity equal to 0.5 was found and was considered the pKa of thelipid.

The pKa determined using this method is precise to about 0.1 pKa units.

Polydispersity Index (PDI) Measurements

Unless indicated otherwise, all PDIs referred to herein are the PDI ofthe fully formed nanoparticle, as measured by dynamic light scatteringon a Malvern Zetasizer. The nanoparticle sample was diluted in phosphatebuffered saline (PBS) so that the count rate was approximately 200-400kcts. The data is presented in Tables 4 and 5 as a weighted average ofthe intensity measure.

The Particle Size of the Lipid Nanoparticle

Unless indicated otherwise, all particle size measurements referred toin Tables 4 and 5 are the Z-average particle size of the fully formednanoparticle, as measured by dynamic light scattering on a MalvernZetasizer. The nanoparticle sample was diluted in phosphate bufferedsaline (PBS) so that the count rate is approximately 200-400 kcts.

Biological Assays Mouse Factor VII Dosing

Female CD-1 mice were received from Harlan Labs and maintained onstandard lab chow and water ad libitum. The animals weighedapproximately 25 grams at time of dosing. Formulated Factor VII siRNAwas administered as a single dose intravenously via the lateral tailvein. Approximately 48 hours after injection, the mice were euthanizedby CO₂ inhalation followed by exsanguination through the vena cava. Theblood was collected in tubes containing 0.105M sodium citrateanticoagulant for plasma Factor VII activity analysis.

Factor VII Activity Assay

Plasma collected from injected mice was assayed for Factor VII enzymeactivity using the Biophen FVII kit from Hyphen Biomedical (catalognumber 221304). An assay standard curve was prepared using pooled plasmaaliquots from the vehicle control animals. All samples were diluted tofall within the linear range of the standard curve and Factor VIIactivity relative to control plasma was reported.

Lipid nanoparticles comprising lipid compounds of formula (I) and theFVII siRNA duplex sequence listed above were tested in the Factor VIIActivity Assay. The results of this assay are given in Table 4 below asa percent knock down of plasma Factor VII enzyme activity at a dose of0.3 mg/kg and 0.03 mg/kg.

TABLE 4 Factor VII Activity Assay Results Using FVII siRNA LipidNanoparticles Cationic Lipid of ¹Lipid KD KD Formula Helper NeutralStealth Molar Size FVII FVII (I) Lipid Lipid Lipid ratio (nm) PDI ²pKa0.3 mg/kg 0.03 mg/kg Ex. 1 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 87.16 0.124 5.59 —30.8 Ex. 1 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 98.2 0.05 5.59 75.1 — DMG Ex. 2 CholDSPC S010 45/44/9/2 92.85 0.067 5.57 — 55   Ex. 2 Chol DSPC PEG-45/44/9/2 97.4 0.04 5.46 95.5 — DMG Ex. 14 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/281.74 0.059 6.11 — — Ex. 26 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 121.6 0.046 6.45 —— Ex. 26 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 104.3 0.04 6.45 58.1 — DMG Ex. 31 CholDSPC S010 45/44/9/2 81.16 0.049 6.01 — — Ex. 33 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/279.15 0.042 5.85 — — Ex. 33 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 107.8 0.06 5.7590.4 — DMG Ex. 34 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 113.8 0.036 5.95 — — Ex. 34Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 126.0 0.06 5.61 0  — DMG Ex. 38 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 120 0.04 5.93 — 43.6 Ex. 38 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 108.00.02 5.9 99   — DMG Ex. 39 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 122.9 0.044 5.91 — —Ex. 40 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 94.28 0.062 6.17 —  8.2 Ex. 40 Chol DSPCPEG- 45/44/9/2 110.9 0.02 6.17 89.8 — DMG Ex. 41 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 170.7 0.119 5.83 — — Ex. 42 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 120 0.0845.93 — 92.8 Ex. 43 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 121.9 0.066 5.85 — — Ex. 43Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 157.8 0.08 5.85 97.4 — DMG Ex. 44 Chol DSPCS010 45/44/9/2 172.9 0.077 5.66 — — Ex. 45 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2102.8 0.072 5.57 — — Ex. 46 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 102.4 0.135 6.18 —— Ex. 47 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 125.9 0.035 6.07 — — Ex. 47 Chol DSPCPEG- 45/44/9/2 109.3 0.06 6.07 99   — DMG Ex. 48 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 152.3 0.105 5.93 — — Ex. 49 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 111.10.046 5.99 — — Ex. 50 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 126 0.056 5.92 — — Ex. 51Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 103.2 0.052 5.91 — — Ex. 52 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 145.4 0.052 5.96 — 73.5 Ex. 52 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 109.40.1 5.96 — 72.5 DMG Ex. 53 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 113.3 0.079 6.03 — —Ex. 53 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 129.1 0.1 5.84 96.6 — DMG Ex. 55 CholDSPC S010 45/44/9/2 106.9 0.043 6.37 — — Ex. 55 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2101.9 0.10 6.03 98.0 — DMG Ex. 56 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 99.47 0.1145.93 — — Ex. 56 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 110.1 0.01 5.71 71.0 — DMG Ex.57 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 123.8 0.059 5.94 — — Ex. 57 Chol DSPC PEG-45/44/9/2 108.4 0.03 5.94 96.7 — DMG Ex. 58 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2138.9 0.022 5.9 —  15.25 Ex. 58 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 120.6 0.06 6.0278.1 — DMG Ex. 59 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 92.56 0.064 6.09 —  48.24 Ex.60 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 95.55 0.098 6.21 —  49.75 Ex. 61 Chol DSPCS010 45/44/9/2 81.79 0.076 5.82 — 0  Ex. 62 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2102.5 0.066 5.9 — 85.8 Ex. 63 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 91.66 0.057 5.92— 75   Ex. 69 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 98.13 0.053 5.3 — — Ex. 77 CholDSPC S010 45/44/9/2 154.1 0.014 6.09 — — Ex. 78 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2178.2 0.043 6.02 — — Ex. 79 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 6.48 — — Ex. 82Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 119.2 0.064 6.03 — — Ex. 83 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 128.5 0.005 6.15 — — Ex. 85 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 5.72 — —Ex. 86 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 120.3 0.058 5.84 — 0  Ex. 86 Chol DSPCPEG- 45/44/9/2 128.7 0.05 5.81 55.3 — DMG Ex. 87 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 159.2 0.089 6.07 — — Ex. 88 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 152.40.046 5.99 — — Ex. 89 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 101.5 0.076 6.02 — — Ex.90 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 87.54 0.073 5.81 — — Ex. 91 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 111.9 0.053 6.01 — — Ex. 91 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 124.30.06 6.01 99.0 — DMG Ex. 92 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 117.3 0.065 5.92 —89.4 Ex. 93 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 121.5 0.071 6.00 —  89.71 Ex. 94Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 116.4 0.073 6.16 — 90   Ex. 96 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 197.3 0.14 5.71 — — Ex. 97 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 98.010.106 5.82 — — Ex. 98 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 164.6 0.096 5.94 — — Ex.99 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 96.61 0.061 5.75 — — Ex. 100 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 105.9 0.121 6.17 — 26.9 Ex. 100 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/2 106.40.07 5.69 94.0 — DMG Ex. 101 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 — — 6.32 — — Ex.104 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 — — 6.02 — — Ex. 106 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 149.3 0.083 6.04 — — Ex. 107 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 191.70.071 6.11 — — Ex. 109 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 91.98 0.09 5.98 —  68.97Ex. 110 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 183.3 0.071 5.66 — — Ex. 111 Chol DSPCS010 45/44/9/2 161.9 0.048 6.27 — — Ex. 112 Chol DSPC PEG- 45/44/9/296.1 0.1 6.08 — 86   DMG ¹The order of the lipid types as they appear inthe molar ratio corresponds to the order in which the lipids appear inthe first four columns of the table. ²pKa refers to the pKa of thecationic lipid of formula (I)

LS411N Xenograft Assay:

Female Nu/Nu mice (6-8 weeks old) were implanted subcutaneously with5×10⁶ LS411N cells. Tumor growth was monitored by caliper measurementbefore treatment initiation. Mice bearing 150-250 mm³ subcutaneoustumors were randomized and enrolled in the study. The stock siRNAformulations were diluted to 0.3 m/ml with PBS for dosing. Animalsenrolled in different groups received a single daily bolus IV injectionof 3 mg/kg siRNA for three days. Tumors were harvested 24 hours postlast injection to assess target gene regulation by qRT-PCR.

Lipid nanoparticles comprising lipid compounds of formula (I) and thePLK1-424 siRNA duplex sequence listed above were tested in the LS411NXenograft Assay. The results of this assay are given in Table 5 below asa percent knock down of PLK-1 mRNA as compared to the control whenadministered as a single daily dose for three days at a dose of 3 mg/kg.

TABLE 5 Lipid Nanoparticles Comprising PLK1-424 siRNA and Results of theLS411N Xenograph Assay. Cationic ³Lipid Lipid of Neutral Helper StealthMolar Size LS411 Formula (I) Lipid Lipid Lipid ratio (nm) PDI ⁴pKa KD 3× 3 mg/Kg Example 1 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 74.56 0.152 5.59 — Example2 Chol DSPC S011 45/44/9/2 88.19 0.1 5.57 — Example 38 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 116.8 0.036 5.93 60 Example 38 Chol DSPC PEG-DSG 45/44/9/2116.8 0.036 5.93 58 Example 39 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 114.3 0.039 5.9155 Example 42 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 181.1 0.06 5.93 50 Example 43Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 150.7 0.046 5.85 40 Example 52 Chol DSPC S01045/44/9/2 132.2 0.06 5.96 50 Example 52 Chol DSPC PEG-DSG 45/44/9/2132.2 0.06 5.96 69 Example 57 Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 116.3 0.038 5.9460 Example 63 Chol DSPC PEG_DSG 45/44/9/2 108.6 0.047 5.9 66 Example 91Chol DSPC S010 45/44/9/2 136.1 0.032 6.01 45 ³The order of the lipidtypes as they appear in the molar ratio corresponds to the order inwhich the lipids appear in the first four columns of the table. ⁴pKarefers to the pKa of the cationic lipid of formula (I)

Immunization Studies:

BALB/c were immunized with liposomes comprising DSPC, cholesterol, andvarious lipids of the invention (or, for comparison, the cationic lipid1,2-dilinoleyloxy-N,N-dimethyl-3-aminopropane or ‘DLinDMA’). Theliposomes encapsulated 0.1 μg of “vA317” self-replicating RNA repliconwhich encodes respiratory syncytial virus F protein (see WO2012/031043).As a negative control, mice received 1 μg of “naked” replicon. Doseswere given either on days 0 & 21 or days 0 & 42. Immune responses wereassessed 2 weeks after each dose (2wp1, 2wp2), and in some cases also at4 weeks after the second dose (4wp2). Four series of experiments wereperformed, each with its own naked control. In all experiments sera wereassessed in two pools, and anti-RSV-F titers are shown in Table 6 below.

TABLE 6 Immunization titers against RSV protein F. Cationic Lipid of2wp1 2wp1 2wp2 2wp2 Formula (I) Course pool 1 pool 2 pool 1 pool 2 4wp2pool 1 4wp2 pool 2 Naked A 115 264 692 5371 — — DLinDMA A 819 954 1831821731 — — Example 2 A 217 259 12785 8232 — — Example 13 A 495 620 715712316 — — Example 14 A 1234 2089 44059 45246 — — Example 9 A 1832 135229707 18788 — — Naked B 155 48 3264 1440 4747 1954 DLinDMA B 13 4 182905538 13936 7020 Example 12 B 88 128 4550 4828 4787 3972 Naked A 219 255855 1052 1157 1726 DLinDMA A 4336 6460 19155 19141 26504 28008 Example26 A 4 4 10 10 10 10 Example 14 A 3098 3539 12785 14582 13687 18851Example 25 A 1217 1883 1611 1156 2850 1767 Naked A 2699 905 5253 54914323 5008 DLinDMA A 4585 3390 60395 56229 50799 35992 Example 14 A 11921206 34906 28736 21375 21347 Example 66 A 75 75 75 75 75 75 Example 68 A1031 494 11315 7800 12963 17734 Example 81 A 1779 1553 24648 15304 4192134684 Example 29 A 2101 3584 12529 18669 23930 37278 Example 70 A 14163110 31550 20124 18779 18358 Example 69 A 2853 4481 23851 20793 1907521504 Course: A = days 0 & 21; B = days 0 & 42.

ENUMERATED EMBODIMENTS Embodiment 1

The present invention provides for a compound of formula (I):

wherein:L is C₁₋₆ alkylene, C₂₋₆ alkenylene, C₂₋₆ alkynylene, —(CH₂)_(r)—C₃₋₇cycloalkylene-(CH₂)_(s)—, —(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇ cycloalkenylene-(CH₂)_(s)—,—(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇ cycloalkynylene-(CH₂)_(s)—, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄alkylene-L2-C₁₋₄ alkylene-,

wherein in the * denotes attachment of the moiety to the NR¹R² group;

-   -   L2, attached in either direction, is —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—,        —OC(O)O—, —CONH—, S(O)₂NH—, NHCONH— or —NHCSNH—;    -   each s is independently 0, 1 or 2;    -   each t is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;    -   u is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;        R¹ and R² are each independently optionally substituted C₁₋₆        alkyl, optionally substituted C₂₋₆ alkenyl, optionally        substituted C₂₋₆ alkynyl, optionally substituted C₃₋₇        cycloalkyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, optionally substituted C₃₋₇        cycloalkenyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, optionally substituted C₃₋₇        cycloalkynyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, or optionally substituted        phenyl-(CH₂)_(s)—; wherein said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆        alkynyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkenyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkynyl,        and phenyl are optionally substituted with one or two        substituents each independently selected from the group        consisting of: OH, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, COOH, and COO—C₁₋₄ alkyl,    -   or        R¹ and R² are joined together forming an optionally substituted        4-12 membered heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring being        optionally substituted with one to three substituents each        independently selected from the group consisting of: OH, halo,        C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, dimethylamino, —COO—C₁₋₄ alkyl, phenyl,        piperidinyl, and morpholinyl;        R³ and R⁴ are each independently:    -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (d) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(b)—Z⁴—R^(a),    -   (e) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a),    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (g) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (h) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(b)—Z⁴—R^(a),    -   (i) —R^(c),    -   (j) —Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c), or    -   (k) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c);    -   wherein Z¹, Z², Z³, and Z⁴, attached in either direction, are        each independently —O—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)O—, or —CONH—;    -   R^(a) is C₂₋₂₂ alkyl, C₂₋₂₂ alkenyl, or C₂₋₂₂ alkynyl;    -   each R^(b) is independently C₁₋₂₀ alkylene, C₂₋₂₀ alkenylene, or        C₂₋₂₀ alkynylene;    -   R^(c) is

-   -   -   R is C₅₋₂₂ alkyl, C₅₋₂₂ alkenyl, or C₅₋₂₂ alkynyl;        -   n is 0-12;        -   m, p, and q are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;

    -   provided that chains (a)-(h) have 12-30 carbon atoms and chains        (i)-(k) have 12-70 carbon atoms;

X is CR⁶ or N; and

R⁶ is H, halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl, or R⁴; or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof.

Embodiment 2

The compound according to embodiment 1 wherein X is CR⁶; or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 3

The compound according to embodiment 2 wherein R⁶; is H, chloro, bromo,or C₁₋₃ alkyl or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 4

The compound according to embodiment 3 wherein R⁶ is H; or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 5

The compound according to embodiment 4 wherein L is C₁₋₆ alkylene,*—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₄ alkylene-,

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 6

The compound according to embodiment 5 wherein R¹ and R² are eachindependently optionally substituted C₁₋₆ alkyl or R¹ and R² are joinedtogether forming an optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclicring; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 7

The compound according to embodiment 6 wherein:

L is methylene, ethylene, or propylene, orL is *—C₁₋₃ alkylene-OC(O)— orL is *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₂ alkylene-, wherein L2, attached in eitherdirection, is C(O)O or OC(O)O; or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof.

Embodiment 8

The compound according embodiment 7 wherein R¹ and R² are eachindependently optionally substituted methyl or optionally substitutedethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 9

The compound according to embodiment 4 wherein L-NR¹R² group of formula(I) is selected from the group consisting of:

Structure

wherein the dashed line indicate the point of attachment to formula (I);or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 10

The compound according to embodiment 9 wherein R³ and R⁴ are eachindependently:

-   -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (e) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a),    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),    -   (g) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a),    -   (i) —R^(c), or    -   (j) —Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt        thereof.

Embodiment 11

The compound according to embodiment 10 wherein R³ and R⁴ are eachindependently:

-   -   (a) —Z¹—R^(a),    -   (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), or    -   (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a); or a pharmaceutically acceptable        salt thereof.

Embodiment 12

The compound according to embodiment 11 wherein R³ and R⁴ are eachindependently (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a); or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof.

Embodiment 13

The compound according to embodiment 12 wherein Z¹ is —O—; R^(b) isC₁₋₁₀ alkylene; Z² is —OC(O)—; and R^(a) is C₅₋₁₈ alkyl or C₁₁₋₁₈alkenyl having one to three double bonds; or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 14

The compound according to embodiment 10 wherein R³ and R⁴ are eachindependently (i) —R^(c); R^(c) is c1 or c3; n is 1 or 2; m is 0 or 1;and p is 1; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 15

The compound according to any one of embodiments 1-14 wherein R⁴═R³; ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 16

The compound according to embodiment 1 having the following formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 17

The compound according to embodiment 1 having the following formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 18

A lipid composition comprising a compound according to anyone ofembodiments 1-17 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Embodiment 19

The lipid composition according embodiment 18 further comprising abiologically active agent.

Embodiment 20

The lipid composition according embodiment 19 wherein the biologicallyactive agent is a siRNA.

Embodiment 21

The lipid composition according to embodiment 20 further comprising ahelper lipid.

Embodiment 22

The lipid composition according to embodiment 21 further comprising aneutral lipid.

Embodiment 23

The lipid composition according to embodiment 22 further comprising astealth lipid.

Embodiment 24

The lipid composition according to embodiment 23 wherein the helperlipid is cholesterol, the neutral lipid is DSPC, and the stealth lipidis PEG-DMG, S010 or S011.

Embodiment 25

The lipid composition according to embodiment 24 in the form of a lipidnanoparticle.

Embodiment 26

The lipid composition according to embodiment 25 having a molar ratio ofabout 44/about 45/about 9/about 2 of a compound of formula(I)/cholesterol/DSPC/S010 or S011.

Embodiment 27

A pharmaceutical composition comprising a lipid composition according toany one of embodiments 19-26 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrieror excipient.

Embodiment 28

A method for the treatment of a disease or condition comprising the stepof administering a therapeutically effective amount of lipid compositionaccording to any one of embodiments 19-27 to a patient in need oftreatment thereof.

Embodiment 29

A method for the treatment of a disease or condition comprising the stepof administering a therapeutically effective amount of pharmaceuticalcomposition according embodiment 28.

1. The present invention provides for a compound of formula (I):

wherein: L is C₁₋₆ alkylene, C₂₋₆ alkenylene, C₂₋₆ alkynylene,—(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇cycloalkylene-(CH₂)_(s)—, —(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇cycloalkenylene-(CH₂)_(s)—, —(CH₂)_(s)—C₃₋₇ cycloalkynylene-(CH₂)_(s)—,*—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₄ alkylene-,

 wherein in the * denotes attachment of the moiety to the NR¹R² group;L2, attached in either direction, is —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—,—OC(O)O—, —CONH—, S(O)₂NH—, NHCONH— or —NHCSNH—; each s is independently0, 1 or 2; each t is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; u is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4,5, or 6; R¹ and R² are each independently optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl, optionally substituted C₂₋₆ alkenyl, optionally substituted C₂₋₆alkynyl, optionally substituted C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, optionallysubstituted C₃₋₇ cycloalkenyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, optionally substituted C₃₋₇cycloalkynyl-(CH₂)_(s)—, or optionally substituted phenyl-(CH₂)_(s)—;wherein said C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl,C₃₋₇ cycloalkenyl, C₃₋₇ cycloalkynyl, and phenyl are optionallysubstituted with one or two substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of: OH, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, COOH, and COO—C₁₋₄ alkyl,or R¹ and R² are joined together forming an optionally substituted 4-12membered heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring being optionallysubstituted with one to three substituents each independently selectedfrom the group consisting of: OH, halo, C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₁₋₃ alkoxy,dimethylamino, —COO—C₁₋₄ alkyl, phenyl, piperidinyl, and morpholinyl; R³and R⁴ are each independently: (a) —Z¹—R^(a), (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a),(c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a), (d)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(b)—Z⁴—R^(a), (e) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a), (f)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), (g) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a), (h)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(b)—Z⁴— R^(a), (i) —R^(c), (j)—Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c), or (k) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c); wherein Z¹, Z², Z³, andZ⁴, attached in either direction, are each independently —O—, —C(O)O—,—OC(O)O—, or —CONH—; R^(a) is C₂₋₂₂ alkyl, C₂₋₂₂ alkenyl, or C₂₋₂₂alkynyl; each R^(b) is independently C₁₋₂₀ alkylene, C₂₋₂₀ alkenylene,or C₂₋₂₀ alkynylene; R^(c) is

R is C₅₋₂₂ alkyl, C₅₋₂₂ alkenyl, or C₅₋₂₂ alkynyl; n is 0-12; m, p, andq are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; provided that chains (a)-(h)have 12-30 carbon atoms and chains (i)-(k) have 12-70 carbon atoms; X isCR⁶ or N; and R⁶ is H, halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl, or R⁴; or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof.
 2. The compound according to claim 1 wherein Xis CR⁶; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 3. The compoundaccording to claim 2 wherein R⁶; is H, chloro, bromo, or C₁₋₃ alkyl or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 4. The compound according toclaim 3 wherein R⁶ is H; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.5. The compound according to claim 4 wherein L is C₁₋₆ alkylene, *—C₁₋₄alkylene-L2-, *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₄ alkylene-, or

 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 6. The compoundaccording to claim 5 wherein R¹ and R² are each independently optionallysubstituted C₁₋₆ alkyl or R¹ and R² are joined together forming anoptionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 7. The compound according toclaim 6 wherein: L is methylene, ethylene, or propylene, or L is *—C₁₋₃alkylene-OC(O)— or L is *—C₁₋₄ alkylene-L2-C₁₋₂ alkylene-, wherein L2,attached in either direction, is C(O)O or OC(O)O; or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof.
 8. The compound according claim 7 wherein R¹and R² are each independently optionally substituted methyl oroptionally substituted ethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof.
 9. The compound according to claim 4 wherein L-NR¹R² group offormula (I) is selected from the group consisting of: Structure

wherein each dashed line indicates the point of attachment to formula(I); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 10. The compoundaccording to claim 9 wherein R³ and R⁴ are each independently: (a)—Z¹—R^(a), (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), (c) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a), (e)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(a), (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), (g)—R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(b)—Z³—R^(a), (i) —R^(c), or (j) —Z¹—R^(b)—R^(c);or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 11. The compoundaccording to claim 10 wherein R³ and R⁴ are each independently: (a)—Z¹—R^(a), (b) —Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a), or (f) —R^(b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a); or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 12. The compound according toclaim 11 wherein R³ and R⁴ are each independently (b)—Z¹—R^(b)—Z²—R^(a); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. 13.The compound according to claim 12 wherein Z¹ is —O—; R^(b) is C₁₋₁₀alkylene; Z² is —OC(O)—; and R^(a) is C₅₋₁₈ alkyl or C₁₁₋₁₈ alkenylhaving one to three double bonds; or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof.
 14. The compound according to claim 10 wherein R³ and R⁴ areeach independently (i) —R^(c); R^(c) is c1 or c3; n is 1 or 2; m is 0 or1; and p is 1; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 15. Thecompound according to claim 1 wherein R⁴ and R³ are the same; or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 16. (canceled)
 17. (canceled)18. A lipid composition comprising a compound according to claim 1 or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 19. The lipid compositionaccording claim 18 further comprising a mRNA.
 20. (canceled)
 21. Thelipid composition according to claim 19 further comprising a helperlipid, a neutral lipid, or a stealth lipid, or a combination thereof.22. (canceled)
 23. (canceled)
 24. The lipid composition according toclaim 21 wherein the helper lipid is cholesterol, the neutral lipid isDSPC, and the stealth lipid is PEG-DMG, S010, or S011.
 25. The lipidcomposition according to claim 24 in the form of a lipid nanoparticle.26-29. (canceled)